JP2020031688A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To perform selection of a performance mode after a special game in a novel manner, for improving an amusement of a game.SOLUTION: When a 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period is generated in an ending period after all round games are finished, and a mode selection screen is displayed. When a 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period is generated (started) in a period since 14R to a halfway of a 15R (final R) of the jackpot game. In a 13R before generation (before start) of the mode selection period, a notification screen for notifying a player of a fact that the mode selection period is started since a next round is displayed. In the 14R, the mode selection period is generated and the mode selection screen is displayed, and in the 15R, a count-down display is executed. Therefore, a performance mode selection can be prevented from becoming monotonous and it is possible to give a novel impression to a player regarding the performance mode selection.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been widely known gaming machines that perform variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on a display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is a gaming machine of this type that is configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (for example, see Patent Document 1). The timing at which the effect mode can be selected can be set at various times, for example, during the change display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. In some configurations in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected.

JP 2006-174956 A

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem of lack of freshness. there were.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to select an effect mode after a special game in a new mode, and to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the present invention has adopted the following configurations.
That is, the gaming machine of the means 1 is:
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured so that it is possible to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, there is provided a selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from among the plurality of effect modes. I do.

  According to the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new manner.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of an example of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3 and is a view showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers which a microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a general-purpose operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. 7 is a flowchart of a special figure 2 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 1; It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hitting game). 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 2; It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a table | surface which shows the symbol type of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of state A. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in state B. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode C, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of effect mode C. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in effect mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetch effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen from before the start of the mode selection period during the big hit game to after the start. (A) is a table showing types of second effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing types of third effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode D). It is a figure showing an example of a display of a notice image in effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a preview image.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the symbol change display, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a hit game capable of providing a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 on which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall island facility. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. The front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end (the left side in FIG. 1) in the up-down direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 around the one side end. It is configured. In addition, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  Further, the front frame 51 has a firing handle 60 for firing game balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and stores the game balls and supplies the stored game balls to the launch device side. A high-strength ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, a front effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to) that can be operated by the player during the execution of the game effect executed as the game progresses, etc. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The effect buttons to be used can be properly used for the plurality of effect buttons according to the type of the game effect. Note that the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and may be any as long as it can detect an input from a player, or an input detecting means (for example, a player directly touching the button portion to make an input). , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.) or a non-contact type input detecting means (a photoelectric type, etc.) for detecting that a part of the player's body has approached and performing an input. Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decoration frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily recognized by the player. And is installed so as to be inclined toward the outside. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described below, execute / non-execute a game, the state of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game effects (characters and staging patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, and information related to games (acquired payout information, number of rounds, number of consecutive play, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of game effects, etc.) , Information on the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information among these pieces of information. The image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information when displaying different information among these information. Sometimes. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the other one displays different information. May be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

  The image display device 7 is provided in an area inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display apparatus 71 and the third image display apparatus 72 are provided in an area outside the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Have been. Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are opened around the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 is provided with a pachinko machine. This is a configuration for preventing the gaming machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball rental machine, inter-chamber facility, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball fired by operating the firing handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded. Further, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent a game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an "effect symbol display portion") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side. ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low-accuracy low-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. The effect design 8L is also referred to as “left design”, the effect design 8C is also referred to as “middle design”, and the effect design 8R is also referred to as “right design”.

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low-precision low-base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low base state, the frequency of entering game balls into the starting port (the second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether a special symbol is hit or not. The determination probabilities (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) are low probabilities (also referred to as “predetermined probabilities”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. (More than twice) is set (all deviations are 10 minutes). For this reason, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the second game area) is displayed rather than the game ball being fired in the right game area 3B (the second game area) and the second special symbol is variably displayed by entering the second starting port 21. It is more advantageous for the player to shoot a game ball in the first game area and enter the first starting port 20 to perform a game in which the first special symbol is variably displayed. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main game state in which the variable display is performed. For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 4) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display section" and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section"). The result of the symbol change display (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. In addition, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to simply as “hit / fail judgment” or “first hit / fail judgment”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to as “hit / fail judgment execution means” or “first hit / fail judgment execution means”.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (zolo) such as “777” (also referred to as “big hit symbol”). Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a special chance design such as “135” or a special hit design such as “3 ★ 3” (also referred to as a “small hit design”) is produced. Stop and display the symbol. In addition, when the small hit occurs, instead of the mode in which the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol having the same mode may be stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol and the off symbol. Also, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" or "373" is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed in a different symbol (the "off symbol"). ”). Thus, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) by looking at the effect symbol stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol correct / improper judgment by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. It is understood by looking at the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as the aspect of the effect symbol change display, for example, an aspect of scrolling display in up, down, left, right, diagonal directions, or the like, an aspect of effect display using only the first effect symbol display section 7b, or a first effect symbol display section 7b In addition to the above, there is a mode in which an effect is displayed by using one or both of the second effect symbol display section 71a and the third effect symbol display section 72a. In addition, in addition to this, a mode in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a may be provided.

  In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect design game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, the game effect is executed along with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect), a demonstration effect for customer waiting, and the like are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to the effect design such as a numeral, an effect image other than the effect design such as a background image or a character image is displayed. As will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play a game, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the player is playing a game or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a parallel (simultaneous) manner. Machine is also referred to as “simultaneous variation machine (parallel variation machine)”.

  Further, a display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit) for displaying the first effect suspension 9a according to the number of first special figure suspensions described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure holds stored, which will be described later. The first special figure reservation displayed on a first special figure reservation display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later according to the display mode (the number of displays) of the first production reservation 9a or the second production reservation 9b in the production suspension display area. And the number of stored second special figure reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In some cases, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game balls can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. The game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first starting port 20 described later with a higher possibility than game balls not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an electric decoration member (a board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to a game state, and which forms characters, figures, and the like is arranged. I have.

  A movable decorative member 14 operable in accordance with the game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but, for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward along with execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting (a predetermined decorative member). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player can enhance the interest in the game and the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change. Based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for a special symbol hit determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit determination related to the first special symbol ( The first special symbol determination is performed, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination.

  Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a general-purpose starting port, a passing port, an entrance port, a specific starting port) through which game balls can pass (can enter). Mouth). Game balls that have entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 pass through the gate 28 and flow down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also called a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, the present gate is the gate 28 and also the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is usually obtained, and when a predetermined condition (variation condition) is established, the normal In addition to executing the symbol win / fail determination (also referred to as "second win / fail determination"), the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol win / fail determination. When the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs a normal symbol hit / fail determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as a “hit / hit determination execution unit”. It is also referred to as "second validity determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the condition for executing the big hit game is satisfied (executing the big hit game). (Also referred to as a possible state or a jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, a control process for a normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. Also, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot waiting state), the jackpot game in the standby mode is started, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game in which the first winning port 30) is in an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first area having a first special winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening and closing member 32, and opens and closes the first special winning opening 30 by operating the opening and closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface. In a closed state, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 is closed, and a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first special winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted in the direction of the back of the game board 3 so that the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 enters the first special winning opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when opened (at the time of opening), smoothly plays the flowing game balls in the first large winning opening 30. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30 and in the closed state (at the time of closing), the flowing game ball can be guided in an arbitrary direction (a second starting port 21 described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first large winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is configured such that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes a non-entering state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter, and an entry in which game balls enter. It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is no change in the ease of entry of the game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of a game ball into the third starting port 26, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol ( The second special symbol win / fail determination is executed, the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail determination. In addition, the game ball passage branches below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage in which the third starting port 26 is provided, the second starting port 31 and the second starting ball 31. A lower game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26 or the like. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter a ball, a large hit is made in a left hit game (a so-called initial hit), and the first big hit game is executed in a right hit game. During the big hit game, a game ball is put into the third starting port 26 (reserved), and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream of) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball is changed. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 is provided. Based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (the The second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the determination.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “open / close member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and disables game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. I have. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It is not necessary that the ball cannot be entered.

  The movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface, similar to the opening / closing member 32. In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and the movable ball 23 is closed. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 and passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the direction of the back surface of the game board 3 (in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. As described above, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when in the open state (at the time of opening), the game ball that has flowed down. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21 and, when in the closed state (at the time of closing), the flowing game ball is flown in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning opening 35 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. Lead to.

  In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (the downstream of) the second starting port 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a “second variable ball entrance”) is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening and closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening and closing member 37. Like the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37 has an upper surface formed as a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (a long plate shape). In the closed state, the opening and closing of the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 35 is performed. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper). Thus, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the direction of the back surface of the game board 3 (in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that has been used disappears from the entrance of the second special winning opening 35. Thus, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. As described above, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Smoothly into the second special winning opening 35, and guides the flowing game balls in the closed state (at the time of closing) in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable entrance) opens and closes the opening / closing member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter (closed state). It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  Further, a plurality of (three) general entrances 27 are provided in a game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3. In this manner, the game area 3 where various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and the hitting method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state, state A) at the time of the start of the game, the player hits the first starting port 20 by left-handing. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly involving a ball entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed (first special symbol hit / fail judgment).

  On the other hand, if a big hit is determined in the hit determination (first special symbol hit / fail determination) based on the ball entry into the first starting port 20, after the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) end (low-precision high base state or high accuracy The low base state) is a game in which the player hits the gate 28, the first winning port 30, the second starting port 21, or the second winning port 35 by right-handing. In other words, the jackpot game and the low-probability high-base state (state B) or the high-probability low-base state (state C) mainly involve entering the second starting port 21 by right-handing (second special symbol hit / fail judgment). It becomes a right-handed game. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first special winning opening 30, the second special winning opening 35, and the general receiving opening 27, the respective starting openings are provided. , A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profits”) are paid out (given). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the ball entering the first large winning opening 30 is determined by the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35. More than the number (the amount of game profit) is set. Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 pays out 15 winning balls for one entering ball, and the second special winning opening 35 provides 10 winning balls for one entering ball. Prize balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game board 2. On the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for changing and displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner and a second special symbol display for changing and stopping the second special symbol are displayed. And a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for changing and stopping and displaying a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information"). In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special figure suspension display 43a that displays the number of pieces of the validity determination information (first special figure reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the validity determination information (second number) related to the second special symbol. A second special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold) and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

  The main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination has been a hit, and a first special symbol hit / fail determination or a second special symbol hit / fail determination. When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a launch direction of the game ball, that is, a right strike. A firing direction indicator 47 indicating whether the state should be left or left should be included. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The change display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed, and the first symbol 20 or the second symbol is displayed by the special symbol (stop symbol) which is stopped (derived). The result of the hit judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the ball entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit / fail determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the stop pattern is an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol stopped and displayed. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning port 30 or the second big winning port 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p” and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) occurs, the four LEDs of “jnkl” are turned on and the remaining lights are turned off. In the case of disconnection, two LEDs of “lo” can be turned on, and the remaining LEDs can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a" to "h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. As in the case of the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is set to a different display mode according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED may be turned on so that light flows repeatedly.

  Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and effect symbols (display results of variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as “hit style. , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment is "Off", "Non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". The stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is referred to as “small hit”. It is also referred to as "hit mode." Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display), and the special symbol display 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various kinds of information such as a random number for special symbol hit determination based on the entering ball (“acquisition information”). ), And the obtained various information is temporarily stored in a special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. More specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”), If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquired information”). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also generally referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is consumed when the special symbol change display based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Extinguishing the special figure hold refers to determining a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and executing a special symbol change display for indicating the determination result. Accordingly, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol fluctuation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entering, that is, each special During the execution of the variable display of the symbols or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, a predetermined number (four each) is set as an upper limit, and the right of the special symbol hit / judgment judgment for the entering ball is reserved (reserved). ) Can be.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special map reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs “uv”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special map reservation, the first special map reservation display 43a is provided. Displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. When the number of reservations is 2, a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u.multidot.v". When the number of reservations is 3, a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u • v •”, can be adopted. When the number of reservations is four (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green, such as “u v v”, to provide a display mode. Also, the second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”. By controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure reservation, the second special figure reservation display 43b is displayed. This is to display the number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green). 4 is also set in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Normally, the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). The normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined time, then stops and displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 by the stopped and displayed normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The ordinary symbol stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment. When the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (hit ordinary symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state ("specific game"). Also called). The means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game executing means (specific game executing means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol correct / non-permissible determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the hit ordinary symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is stopped and displayed as "s @ t @" (for example, Δ: turned on, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-usual ordinary design in which only the t LED is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random symbol for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, based on the passage, and acquires the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general drawing reservation in a general drawing storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of general drawing reservations that can be stored in the general drawing storage unit 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general figure holding stored in the general figure holding storage unit 86 is exhausted when it becomes possible to change and display the normal symbol based on the general figure holding. The term “extension of ordinary symbol holding” refers to determining a random number for determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is accepted corresponding to the ordinary symbol holding, and executing a variation display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (reserve) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is accepted for passing through a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the public figure reservation is displayed on the general figure hold display 44. Specifically, the general-purpose reservation display 44 includes two LEDs “qr”, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of general-purpose reservations. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights red, ▲: lights green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as "qr". Also, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as in the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (“main control unit”, “main control unit”, A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", a "sub-control unit", or a "presentation control unit") for performing control relating to effects performed in accordance with the progress of the game, a game ball. A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that controls the payout of the game, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect display 102, a third effect hold display 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling display of the fourth effect suspension display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Above this main control board case, A storage case such as an image control board that stores the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided. A sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the storage case such as the image control board. Is provided. On the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided. On the right side, a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the progress of the game and the like, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally provided. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage unit 85 (the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and the general figure reservation storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detection means”.

  The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 and detects a game ball entering the general entrance 27.

  As the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first winning port solenoid 33, and a second winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure reservation display 43a, a second special figure reservation display 43b, A drawing hold display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of the main display 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout apparatus 120 for paying out a prize ball or a lending ball, and a card unit 135, and is also connected to a firing control board 111 (also referred to as a “fire control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of FIG. 1), and when a player performs a predetermined ball lending operation, the inserted prepaid card (game) This allows a ball to be lent based on information stored in a value storage medium or the like.

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives to pay out prize balls or pays out ball rentals. The payout game balls are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 controls the firing handle 60 of the firing handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the driving of the firing motor 113 is controlled so that the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 5, on the sub-control board 90, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling a game effect with the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. I have. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another substrate or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally provided.

  An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 sends a command to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display 102, the third effect suspension display 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display 103b Control is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, and symbols (including effect designs, reserve designs, and the like), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED has a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a fluctuation display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display and the corresponding special LED is turned on or off or the color indicates the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination). To stop display. Similarly, the third effect holding display 103a and the fourth effect holding display 103b are each also composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display 103a is displayed on the first effect holding display 43a and the number of holdings displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c. The display control is performed in a display mode showing the same number of held items as the number of held items. Further, the fourth effect suspension display 103b is controlled to be displayed in a display mode showing the same number of suspensions as the number of suspensions displayed on the second production suspension display area 9d and the number of suspensions displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b. You.

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (production design display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (production design display unit) to display the display screen 7a (production design display). By covering a part or substantially the entirety of the part, the effect design 8, the first effect suspension display part 9c, or the part or all of the second effect suspension display part 9d may become invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, In addition, a fourth effect suspension display 103b is provided. In addition, the display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect suspension display 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display 103b is such that the visual recognition is not hindered by the operation of the movable decoration member 14 and the like, and is always visible. Has become. Also, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sound, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The sound data such as the sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute the audio control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and the ROM may store sound data. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on a command received from the main control board 80, and is configured to emit light pattern data (data for determining light / light off, light color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operation pattern data thus obtained. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and a second effect button 63b. The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, control related to special symbol hit / fail judgment in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. At the time of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "small hit", "small hit design" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "missing", "missing design" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a “special game” in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed is executed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and a hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specified result) of the special symbol hit / fail determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specified result, the second specified result, the second specified result, or another specified result, a different hit type (big hit) , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may be different depending on the hit type, and the game profit amount that can be obtained by the special game is different, and the game state after the end of the special game is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R No. There are "5 big hits", "2R sixth big hits", "2R seventh big hits", and "2R eighth big hits". In the “15R third big hit”, the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the big winning port (the first big winning port 30) is 15 times. The “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) of four. The “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30). Two times. As described above, in the case of the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is all opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big winning winning opening (variable winning opening for big hit)".

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” indicate a game state after the end of the big hit game. To the high probability state (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as “probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)”. This high probability state (probable change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. The “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

  The “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” are the “second special symbol time saving” in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time after the end of the big hit game. Activate the function and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the game property in the high-accuracy low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special This is a period in which a small hit is generated by performing a symbol hit / fail determination, and the number of game balls can be increased in a period (a big hit) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by frequently causing small hits in the high-probability and low-base state between the big hits, it is expected that a large number of game balls can be obtained in a short time due to the small hits. In other words, this is a period that is advantageous for the player, and is a period in which the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” activate the “second special symbol time saving function” and “high base generating function” after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd big hit" and "2R 8th big hit", the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol change display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol change display is completed based on 100 executions, the gaming state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the case of "2R seventh big hit", the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol is displayed 50 times. When the special symbol change display is completed 50 times, the game state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-probability and high-base state, the right special game is performed in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed. Is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of occurrence of a big hit.

  In the “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” are activated after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state. In the case of “2R fifth big hit”, the “second special symbol time saving function” continues until the next big hit occurs, and the “high base generating function” determines whether the next big hit occurs or the special symbol changes The process ends when the display is executed 50 times. As described above, the “probable change function” is continued until the next big hit occurs. In other words, in the case of "2R 5th big hit", after the big hit game ends, until the variation display of the special symbol elapses 50 times, the state is set to the high-accuracy high base state. , The game state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state.

  In the high-accuracy high base state, similar to the low-probability high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, a second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, and the game is expected in the expectation of the next big hit. As described above, the high-probability low-base state is a period that is advantageous for a player who can expect to obtain many game balls in a short time due to small hits by frequent small hits as described above. is there. It is assumed that more game balls can be obtained in the high-accuracy low-base state than in the high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed after the big hit game ends, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state).

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit" is, after the big hit game ends, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol elapses 100 times, it is in a high-accuracy high base state, and if no big hit occurs even after 100 times, This is the same as “2R fifth big hit” except that the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state, that is, the period in which the gaming state changes is different. In addition, the timing when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state is set earlier for “2R fifth big hit” than for “2R sixth big hit”. Therefore, it can be said that "2R fifth big hit" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than "2R sixth big hit".

  In addition, a high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and a low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty-based state, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, so that the player is not notified. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit) related to “2R sixth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy low-base state (an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player) after 100 times of the change display of the special symbol, and the “2R In the case of "8th big hit", the game state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed, so that the player is not notified. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. The high-probability base state, the high-probability base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit”, and the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-probability high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is in. Difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not notified (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times. In addition, when the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy low-base state (an advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed, In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low-accuracy low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed. For this reason, in the non-notification state, the player plays a game in the non-notification state, expecting to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state when the special symbol change display is performed 50 times. , Will increase the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected not to shift to the low-accuracy low-base state but to at least continue to the high-base state (that is, to continue the non-notification state). I do. If the non-notification state continues after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the state will shift to the high-accuracy low base state. Playing with the expectation that the game will be done will enhance the entertainment of the game. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points for increasing the player's sense of expectation are set a plurality of times, so that it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long time.

  In addition, the number of small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / falling determination is that the number of times the large winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is opened is six times, and one (and one) compared to other large hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed for a total of 1.8 seconds with the opening being performed six times in 0.3 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R third big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, and the like), the number of the game balls that can be acquired by one small hit game is set. However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In the case of small hits, the second special winning opening 35 is opened, and the first special winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second special winning opening 35 is also referred to as a “small winning large winning opening (variable winning opening for small hits)”. In the case of a small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening. In addition, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the gaming state at the time of the small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is also set to a high probability state after the end of the small hit game, and when the small hit occurs Is a low-probability state, the low-probability state is maintained even after the small hitting game is over. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R third big hit, 5% for the 4R fourth big hit, 5% for the 2R fifth big hit, and 5% for the 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, and 2R eighth big hit is 10%. In other words, when the second special symbol time-saving function described later is activated, a hit is determined by a hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the second starting port 21 whose frequency of change is improved (a second special symbol hit / fail determination). It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than in the hit / fail determination (the first special symbol hit / fail determination) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that the big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters the ball is more likely to be advantageous (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) to the player. I have. Further, the player plays the game in expectation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of the high-accuracy low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination as to whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is made based on “special symbol hit / fail judgment random number (also referred to as“ hit / fail judgment information ”). Is determined based on "big hit type determining random numbers (also referred to as" symbol determining random numbers "and" symbol determining information ")." As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include, in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the big hit type determination random number, a “variation pattern”. Random number (also referred to as “variation pattern information”) ”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is correct as shown in FIG. The normal symbol hit determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit determination). Normally, the symbol random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 240.

  Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the functions of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the variation time reducing function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port are activated or inactive. There are a plurality of game states depending on the combination of the states. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). In other words, in the low-probability state, the hit determination is performed using the large-hit determination table for the low-probability state. The determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display being a big hit (stop symbol being a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol hit determination is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variation time reducing function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state", and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". In the time reduction state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table determined so that the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected more frequently than in the non-time reduction state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with a smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the “second special symbol time reduction function” as shown in FIG. I have. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and causes the second starting port 21 to enter a game ball, the second special symbol The symbol correct / non-permissible determination is performed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as a “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the player performs a right-handed game in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game proceeds with the left-hitting game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (in parallel) perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the state A, even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variation display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be changed and displayed.

  When the second special symbol time reduction function is operating, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. (2) Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player plays the right-handed game without reducing the number of possessed balls as compared to the left-handed game (maintained or slightly decreased in state B, state C) It is possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second special symbol fluctuating game). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time reduction function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, but the first special symbol time reduction function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the ordinary symbol operate in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state) in the gaming state, and are operated in the low base state (low-precision low-base state, high-precision state). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the “general figure high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than in the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). A normal symbol hit / fail judgment (ordinary symbol judgment) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display 42 is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol being a hit (a stopped symbol is an ordinary hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second opening is in an open state during the operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 second. In the present embodiment, the number of times of the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37 is made different between the time of the low base state and the time of the high base state, but the number of the opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, and the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be performed six times in 1.0 second, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. In such a case, the opening number increasing function of the variable prize device 22 is also activated.

  In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 of the normal symbol are activated, so that these functions are not activated compared to the low base state. The period during which the second starting port 21 is open is prolonged (opening time per unit time is prolonged), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is increased (also referred to as a “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is increased. As described above, in the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

  If the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of times of opening, the lower the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once every 6.0 seconds, and furthermore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the change of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is such that the game ball starts flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21. The time is set such that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state is flowing, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. Further, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is replaced with a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material forming the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode of reducing the falling speed, the inclination angle may be reduced, or an obstruction member (a protrusion or the like) for reducing the falling speed may be provided. In this way, in the high base state, the game ball flowing down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second large winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the small hit and the second large winning opening 35 are in the open state (ball entry possible state), the flowing game ball enters the second starting port 21 and enters the second starting port 21. It is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35.

  The high base state may not be where all of the above functions are activated. That is, the activation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize device 22 for the ordinary symbol has a second starting port compared to when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that the ball 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the special symbol time reduction state. The function of generating such a high base state is called a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since the determination of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the determination of the first special symbol, the player determines the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner without performing the variable display. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), there is a possibility that a right-handed game is attempted. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, the variance display cannot be performed a large number of times, and the game efficiency is extremely poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, the “state in which the first special symbol is not being played (non-game state)” means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is “0”. ". The “state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-game state)” means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is “0”. It means that.

  In the high base state such as the high-accuracy high base state and the low-accuracy high base state, and in the high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time-saving function, and the right-handed game Game efficiency is improved. In such a case, performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol win / fail determination which is advantageous for the player can advantageously advance the game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right hit is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct.

  In the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of the ball entering the second starting port 21 is the same as that in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), but is executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol to be changed is changed in a short time, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol determination can be executed. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, the entry into the second starting port 21 is not performed. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of this, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment determines that a small hit (small hit probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of holding balls by performing (generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game allows the ball to frequently enter the second starting port 21 without greatly reducing the number of balls held. 2 Aim for the next big hit by the special symbol hit / fail judgment. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on entering the second starting port 21 is set to one. Even if all the right-hitting game balls enter the second starting port 21, the game The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-hitting game balls are set so as to enter the second starting port 21, the high baseball is used as long as the ball does not enter another entry port. When the condition is continued for a long time, the number of balls held is reduced, albeit slightly.

  On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency by the right-handed game by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, and the possession of the ball in the small hit game is performed. At the same time as increasing the number, the second special symbol is judged to be the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low-base state lasts), the more small hits are generated. There are many opportunities (to execute a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game state]
As shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area with a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first special winning opening 30, The two starting ports 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in this order in an optimal order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning ports is in the closed state, almost (90%) of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are opened. Above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second It flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and flows down to the out opening 34. If there is a winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball is located in the game area downstream therefrom. It has a configuration that does not work.

  By arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second starting port 21 or the like that is opened prevents a game ball from reaching the gate 28. In addition, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of waiting time (a state in which the ordinary symbols do not fluctuate) due to the ordinary symbol holding being “0”. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all right-hit game balls can pass through the gate 28 irrespective of the presence or absence of opening of other winning ports. Further, since the game balls that have passed through the gate 28 flow down the right game area to the downstream side as they are, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning port.

  When a right-handed game is performed in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), it is determined whether the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) which is almost a hit, so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. That is, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and a normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, the game ball passing through the gate reaches the second starting port 21 before reaching the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once in 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closed → 6). 2.0 seconds open → 1 second closed → about 6.0 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are almost (about 80 to 90%) in the second starting port 21. I will enter the ball. When a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. In the second special symbol success / failure determination, in the high-accuracy high base state, a big hit occurs with a probability of 1/63, a small hit occurs with a probability of 30/63, and a miss occurs with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of the second special symbol right / wrong determination is off, most (approximately 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branched before the second start port 21 without flowing down to the second start port 21. 26, or flows into the out port 34. Thereby, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is continuously executed. Since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is discharged even when one ball has entered the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . In addition, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game smoothly flows through the first big winning port without being interrupted by another winning port such as the second starting port 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big hit game. Because it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second starting port 21 first and does not enter the second starting port 21. A situation occurs in which only the game ball enters the second special winning opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is merely prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, the game does not proceed smoothly, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, by arranging the first special winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented, and the big hit game can smoothly proceed. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 except during the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is in the open state for most of the period. Therefore, of the game balls flowing down to the second starting port 21, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls enter the second starting port 21 disposed upstream of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, a small hit occurs, and even if a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the downstream second winning opening is performed by the second starting port 21 on the upstream side. The ball entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the second special winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although it is unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 are When the second large winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 if the second large winning opening 35 is open.

  Next, the high-accuracy low-base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handing because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is in an open state (a normal symbol hit / fail determination). In the low-base state (high-accuracy low-base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high-base state, and the probability per symbol is usually about half that of the high-base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if a hit occurs, the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. Becomes Since the probability of a hit is about 1/2, a hit and a miss occur approximately half and half.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21, The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to three times opening of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between the opening times is 0.1 second), the second starting port 21 is kept open as long as the right-handed game is continued. During the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, it closes, when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds thereafter, and when it comes off, the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example in which the hit and the miss occur alternately, the second starting port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens three times for 0.9 seconds, and performs the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, it comes off, and it closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and it repeats the cycle of (close 3 seconds → open about 2.7 seconds → close 3 seconds → close 3 seconds → close about 3 seconds 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, the high-accuracy low-base state is different from the high-base state in which the period during which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 90% and the period during which the second starting port 21 is in the closed state is about 10%. It is highly likely that a game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. . The possibility that the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment is a small hit is the same whether the base is in the high base state (low-precision high base state, high-precision high base state) or the high-precision low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, but has the small hit only in the result of the second special symbol hit / not-determined executed in the right-hit game. ing.

  As described above, in the high-accuracy low base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting port 21) enter the second starting port 21. Instead, the water flows down to the second winning port 35 provided downstream of the second starting port 21. Accordingly, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 downstream of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. State. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). The game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21. If the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and the small hit game As a result, the ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

  The prize balls based on the ball entry into the second large winning opening 35 are set to 10 prize balls for one entering ball, so that the ball is entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state is at least continued until the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit / fail determination (only the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed as long as the right-handed game is continued). Is longer, the player can increase the possession ball. In this embodiment, an average of about 20 prize balls (two balls) can be acquired by one small hitting game. By generating this small hitting game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it becomes possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 by 10 times). In addition, as a result, as a total acquired ball of the “ren-so period” in which the right-handed game is continued, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added in addition to the acquired ball of the big hit game, so that a larger amount of game balls can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for the big hit (only for the big hit), and the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting port 21 are for the small hit ( It is said to be a special winning jackpot for small hits. In addition, by arranging the second big winning port 35 which is a big winning port for small hits downstream of the second starting port 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting port 21 allows the second big winning port 35 to be opened. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (the time when the second starting port 21 is in the open state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol success / failure determination), the high base state ( The high-accuracy low-base state has a higher possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 than the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering a ball). (2) The effect of the opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

  In addition, even in the case of the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the held ball is almost maintained (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the holding ball decrease speed is suppressed). A state in which the game is expected to be a big hit (advantageous big hit) as a result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (high base state), and a small game ball is thrown into the second starting port 21 to enter the game ball. A state in which the player plays a ball in the second special winning opening 35 at the time of a hit and increases the number of balls in possession while expecting the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment to be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and diversify the game. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. It should be noted that a highly accurate low base state in which the number of balls can be increased is more advantageous for the player than a high base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high-accuracy high base state. If the jackpot has not been hit until the display ends, the gaming state is changed to the high-accuracy low-basis state. In addition, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-precision high base state or the high-precision high base state in the effect symbol display unit or the like. A game effect in a simple display mode. Thereby, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-basis state, after that, the state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of changes. It is possible to play games with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the big hit that shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state includes “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”. "2R fifth big hit" shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and "2R sixth big hit" has 100 special symbol fluctuation displays. After elapse, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Also, as the high-accuracy low base state, there are “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit”. The "2R 7th big hit" shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and the "2R 8th big hit" is 100 special specials. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has elapsed, the state shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot game and the high after the jackpot game according to the four jackpot types of “2R fifth jackpot”, “2R sixth jackpot”, “2R seventh jackpot”, and “2R eighth jackpot” By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified is set.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of occurrence of the “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” in the non-notifying state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after elapse, the transition to the high-accuracy low base state is performed after 100 times with a higher possibility than when the high base state ends after 50 times. Shall do. Thereby, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times, and continues the high-base state without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times ( Even if the non-notification state continues, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high-accuracy low-base state. This makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state is the same regardless of whether the shift is performed after 50 times or 100 times. Alternatively, conversely, when shifting 50 times, the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state may be higher than when shifting 100 times. As a result, when the high base state continues even after elapse of 50 times, the expectation for shifting to the high-accuracy low base state is reduced. Further, if another large hit type is provided, and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols have been changed and displayed, after the second predetermined number of times exceeds the first predetermined number of times ( The transition to the high-probability low-base state may be determined (if the jackpot is not hit by then). Conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times exceeds the first predetermined number of times (if a big hit has been reached by then, If not, it may be determined not to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (such as a random number lottery) is satisfied in the middle of the non-reporting state of the high base state, a character or a character whose game state is easily recognizable is displayed to the player (a fixed effect is executed), thereby playing the game. The state may be reported.

  In addition, in the high-accuracy low base state, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and when the result is out, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high base state is as described above. This is the same as when a big hit occurs or when a big hit occurs.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by being also used as the gate 28. In this way, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being obstructed from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21 or the like, and the big hit game is started. It is possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30 and the second The opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 need to be provided upstream.

  Further, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the right game area. In addition, when the left hitting game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the left game area. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is configured by two LEDs “yz”, and indicates the launch direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the LED should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is fluctuated is displayed as “low-accuracy low-base state”, “high-accuracy low-base state”, “ It is possible to control to either the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state. Of these, the low-accuracy low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state", and the high-accuracy low-base state is Also referred to as "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, first, an initial setting is performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, setting of a stack, setting of a constant, setting of an interrupt time, setting of a CPU of the main control board 80, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time), and setting of various flags, status and counters are performed. Perform reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initialization (S101) is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "Private", the special symbol is "Special", the first special symbol is "Special symbol 1" or "First special symbol", and the second special symbol is "Special symbol". 2 "and" second special map ".

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), an update is performed by adding 1 to the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the interruption processing (S105) becomes possible. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a period of, for example, 4 msec. After the interruption process (S105) is completed, before the next interruption process (S105) is started, the updating process of the various counter values by the regular symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. Be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), first, output processing (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. I do. The command and the like output here include information on the gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol as the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper one byte is information on the type of command, and the lower one byte is information on the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second special winning opening sensor 35a, the general entrance detecting sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is the same process as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and during the other periods ( (The period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). Thereby, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203), a starting port sensor detection process (S204), a starting ball entry process (S205), a general symbol operation process (S206), and a special figure 1 operation process (S207) described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball count processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit) next, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output processing (S201) of the interrupt processing (S105) executed again, the command and the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt processing (S105) are output.

[Start port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then, the number of ordinary symbol holding balls (specifically, the number of ordinary symbol holding, specifically, Value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the stored ordinary symbol retaining ball number (S303), and the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the ordinary symbol random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in an address space according to the current number of ordinary symbol retaining balls in the general figure retaining storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached four (the upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the flow proceeds to S309. In S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a special figure 1 related random number is obtained. The process is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of second special map reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the processing is terminated. If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), “1” is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship is established. A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S308), the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number value are stored in the address space according to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball handling process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure holding storage unit is read (S316). S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number counter (special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value) of the read acquired random numbers is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of place (prior determination). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (prior judgment). The determination (advance determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (a so-called “holding pre-reading”) in which a hit / fail determination for the special figure 2 hold (a determination of a big hit) is performed prior to a hit / fail determination in a later-described special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing. )).

  It should be noted that the pre-judgment as to whether or not a big hit is made in a big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in a high probability state, a big hit determination table for a high probability state, or in a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value based on the big hit determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) can be used to determine variation pattern information. And a fluctuation pattern information determination table. In the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of a special symbol success / failure determination random number counter) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to a game state. It is possible to Then, based on the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed, and the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (advance determination information) related to the result of the determination in S317, specifically, information (big hit information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the big hit determination value, Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (big hit type determining random value), and information (small hitting information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the small hit determining value. ), Command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). It should be noted that a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board as the special figure 2 start entering command, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but may transmit game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number.

  Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is determined whether the information is related to the big hit, the type of the big hit, and the information related to the small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in the high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur if the judgment is made in the probability state. Accordingly, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entry command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  Note that, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value among the acquired random number values read in S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit value) is not transmitted. Command data including information indicating the type determination random number), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 2 start ball entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres has increased by "1", similarly to the processing related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to a case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated. The processing in S321 to S323 is the same as the processing in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure holding storage unit is read (S321). Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information related to the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the preliminary determination (read ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the hit / fail determination in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process described later.

[Public figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general-purpose operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start ball entry process (S205). In the general-purpose operation process (S206), the process relating to the ordinary symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal-purpose operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “usual figure operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), a normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “usual figure operation status” is “2” (S401). , NO in S403), the normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and if the "general symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is determined. The process (S406) is performed, and if the “normal drawing operation status” is “4” (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is "0" (S501). If it is determined that the number of retained balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds is selected. After the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), an ordinary symbol random number shift process described below is performed (S504), and then an ordinary symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the ordinary symbol variation start process (S505), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started with the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the ordinary operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal symbol change.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502). In the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / non-judgment random number counter stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by the high-probability general-purpose approval / disapproval determination based on the value “0” to “238” (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether the symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the low base state (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by a low-probability general-purpose pass / fail judgment based on the table for hitting (the hit judgment value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure hit / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605). If it is determined that the result is off (NO in S605), stop display is performed. A normal symbol (a symbol deviating from the ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol per hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Regular pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shifting process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by one (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the general-purpose reservations in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the general-purpose reserve storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general-purpose reserve storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general drawing reservation is digested in the reservation order.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the normal symbol change processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the elapsed time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol variation stop command is set (S802), the ordinary symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed. Other processing, such as stopping at a display result (a winning normal symbol or a lost normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining a normal symbol success / failure, is performed (S804), and the process ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the state is the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for a high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), and proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter for counting the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening of the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is performed as an opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (the second starting port 21). The pattern is set (S906), and the routine goes to S904. The release patterns for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) are release patterns in which release for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the ordinary operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the per-figure end flag is ON (S1001). The ordinary figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not being opened (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second startup port (YES in S1003), control to open the second startup port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened, It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not time to close the second startup port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second startup port (YES in S1005), a process of closing the second startup port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second startup port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the processing is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), a general-purpose hit end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and a general-purpose hit end flag is set ( S1010), end the process. In addition, the second starting port opening counter becomes “0” when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the state B (high base state), and the state A Also, in the state C (low base state), when the opening of the second starting port 21 is performed three times, the state becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per ordinary drawing is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 set in S903 or S906 has been completed. Then, the general figure end flag is turned off (S1011), the general figure flag is turned off (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interruption process, the ordinary symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the ordinary symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the general map operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation processing (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the processing relating to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), a special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), performs special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), The special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, and S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric power as a big hit game If the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process ends. Incidentally, the special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors character processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hitting game is executed.

[Special pattern 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved special ball 1) is “0” (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “0”, that is, that there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), Then, it is determined whether or not the special map 2 is playing (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special map 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), it is in the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during execution of the customer waiting demonstration screen). It is determined whether or not it is (S1208), and if it is determined that it is on the standby screen (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

  Also, in S1201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending ball count is not “0”, that is, there is one or more storage of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (S1201) NO), a special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), a special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and a special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (the second special symbol) is not playing" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is "0". Means that. Of course, this means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special map 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 win / fail determination processing (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure holding storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol hit determination (the oldest memory) which has been stored (the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is performing the variable display relating to the big hit, the other special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail determination, and the small hit or the small hit is determined. Any one of them is missed (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since the second special symbol does not have the small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, when the second special symbol is performing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination executed during that time is: All come off. In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit change flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the change display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, It is determined whether the state is the high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability change flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the state is the low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A). A hit / no-go determination is made based on the table (big hit determination values are “3” and “397”) (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probable change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a hit determination is made based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606). AS) is read out, the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1609). The big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 is turned on (S1610), and the process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the hit determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination of the second special symbol, The big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, one of 4R first big hit and 4R second big hit is executed. If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, a 15R third big hit, a 4R fourth big hit, a 2R fifth big hit, a 2R sixth big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, 2R Either of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a lost symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit change flag, a first big hit change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit change flag, a second small hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the small hit (a change display in which the small hit symbol is stopped) is executed. The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit change flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the change related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an extremely large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special symbol 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the game state is the state A (whether the game state is the low-probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to with reference to the state A big hit table (the part corresponding to the state A and the big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different fluctuation time lengths is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first deviation number departure table (the state A and deviation and departure number of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the portions corresponding to 1 and 2. Also, in S1705, when it is determined that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second out-of-number-of-hold table (FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

  Thereby, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. The possibility that the fluctuation pattern is selected is high. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

  When it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not the state A (low-probability low-base state) (NO in S1701), then, whether the gaming state is the state B (low-probability high-base state, high-probability high-base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state is state B (S1708), then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), with reference to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation is performed based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). A pattern is selected (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Also, in S1708, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the state B (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), that is, the gaming state is the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) (NO in S1708). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (FIG. 9) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C departure table (the part corresponding to state C and departure in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  In the state B and the state C, a game is performed in which the right-handed game is performed mainly with the change display of the second special symbol. Therefore, if the game is performed in accordance with the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first game is performed. Variation display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the state B and the state C is simple (the number of types is small and the fluctuation time is also short). In the state B, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is P15, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is P16. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is P23, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is P24.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In the other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to one lower position (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to the addresses “0000” to “0003”). To the address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure holding storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), the special figure 1 change start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 change start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 change processing (S1104), first, the change time of the special figure 1 (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special map 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the flow shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the flow shifts to the process of S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) for counting the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the state B (high base state) Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the state is the low-accuracy high-base state, the state shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state).

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the change display of the special symbol is stopped at a result according to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 change interruption process (S1902) is executed when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the change display of the special figure 1, This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the suspended measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. Thus, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

  The special figure 1 change interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 change interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the processing is ended. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The suspension flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is suspended (S2904), and the process is terminated. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

  Also, in S2901, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 has been completed, and the special figure 1 interrupt flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. As a result, the suspended display of the first special symbol (measurement of the variation time) can be resumed.

  Here, in the first embodiment, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as a “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit change flag indicating that the big hit change display relating to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating the execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the processing shifts to S2004. In this way, in the special figure 1, it is possible to end the change display relating to the big hit (determine the big hit) and indicate that the game shifts to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed in the big hit game (in the mode of opening one round, one round is from opening to closing of the special winning opening) is set to “4”. (S2004), the big hit opening command is set to start the big hit game (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process is terminated. Further, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be variably displayed. By receiving the stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the change display of the special symbol has been completed. In addition, this will be in a jackpot waiting state. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, the special figure 1 big hit flag (“the first big hit”, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called a "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to a big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag"), which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hitting game is executed, a small hitting flag corresponding to a small hitting flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit at the timing when the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. Specifically, when a 4R first big hit occurs, a display mode such as “2R △ 4R ▲ 15R △” (for example, ：: turned on, Δ: turned off) is used. Next, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in step S206), the processing will be simplified and described below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) performs processing in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) following the special figure 1 operation processing (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed in parallel by the special figure 1 operation processing and the special figure 2 operation processing. That is, the first special figure reservation is consumed and the second special figure reservation is consumed (“variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol”, “first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol”). And ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the second starting opening (the second special symbol determination) is based on the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the first opening (the first special symbol determining). It is more likely to be a big hit (greater amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation processing (S207), the processing relating to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is performed in five stages. Each of these stages is assigned a “special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5”. When the “special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), a special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the “special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), The special symbol 2 finalizing process (S1156) is performed, and when the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, and S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric as a big hit game When the special character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the “special figure 2 operation status” is “5” (S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are all NO), the special electric auditors processing as the small hit game Step 2 (S1109) is performed. The special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination, the special figure 2 operation processing includes a special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation processing.

  Here, the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108) is a common process between the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) Only the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) is performed. This means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because the game cannot be executed in parallel with the jackpot game related to the special symbol (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit. However, as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 hit / fail judgment processing]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure holding) is stored. The stored random number counter value for special symbol determination (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit determination is made. It is determined whether the result of (1) is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit change flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is terminated. Other processes are the same as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), the processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, a column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 is referred to and based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). To select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit change flag is ON, a change pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

  Further, in the state B and the state C, the game is performed mainly by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and a variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small and the time is short).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processes (S1404) are performed, and this process ends. In other processes (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage locations of the various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b are shifted down by one (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure hold fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), the special figure 2 change start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 change start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the second special symbol is started. I do.

[Processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination processing (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs processing (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), first, a big hit game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when a player fires a game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in a big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is determined and stopped with the big hit symbol and turned into a big hit, by passing the game ball to the start gate, the big hit start flag is turned on, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, a telephone, or the like. Then, after the break, the game ball is fired at an arbitrary timing of the player and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can be advanced. The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the first big winning device 31) in the big hit game has all been completed (the big hit game has been finished).

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is being opened (S2104), and it is determined that it is not being opened. In this case (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round. Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next release) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of the big hit.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of entering the special winning opening in the round is the prescribed maximum entering number (this execution). In the first example, it is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 pieces per round) (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of winning balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is determined whether or not it is time to close the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30), that is, the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the server (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the prescribed number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or when the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by one (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned on (S2118), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the last round has been completed, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), a game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing ends.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, it has not passed through the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. In this case (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probable variable flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probable variable flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probable variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and Move on to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the state to the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probable change flag. If it is determined in step S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in step S2154), the process proceeds to step S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), the big hit game is started (to start the round game). The big hit start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. Thereby, the gaming machine is continued in the jackpot waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time is related to the probability change big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are set as the probable big hits. Is determined to correspond to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the game has ended this time is the probable big hit (YES in S2201), the probable change flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203). . If it is determined in S2203 that the big hit game that has been completed is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), and the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205). Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the high base state is established.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has ended is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), and the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211). Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the high-precision high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has been completed is not the 2R sixth big hit, that is, any of the 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. Then, the process ends. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the high-accuracy low base state.

  In S2201, when it is determined that the end is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then, is the jackpot game ended 2R seventh jackpot? Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the big hit game ended is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the low-precision high base state is set. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), "50" is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is completed, and the low probability high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the flag is related to No. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001) ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all been completed in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not being opened (NO in S2302), it is determined whether it is time to open the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small hit has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the interval time between a plurality of times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . Regarding the small hitting game, the small hitting game (opening operation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the small hit symbol is determined and stopped, regardless of the passing of the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the number of all the game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). When it is determined in S2306 that the number of entered balls has not reached the predetermined number (10) (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined time after opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second large winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the flow proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is reset. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit release counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the flow shifts to small hit end processing in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process for ending the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), and a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  When it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since six opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing ends. By generating a small hit game in the high-accuracy low-base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, thereby enhancing the entertainment of the game. Note that, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hitting game.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is terminated. Finish. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball count processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count, the special figure 2 reserved ball count, and the normal symbol reserved ball count stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read (FIG. 45). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (a reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is terminated.

[Power-off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), it is first determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power-off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether the game is stable, whether the game is hit, or the number of pending balls, Data relating to the number of remaining fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter, loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, thereby achieving a unique effect not provided by the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or by comparing with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. Has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a big hit in the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”). Is based on a big hit symbol (which is also stopped and displayed in a “specific display mode”), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the high-probability state ( Benefits) are terminated.

  The process of providing the high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege providing means”. Since the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronized) and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronous), the variation display and the stop display are performed, and the same result is determined. "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the hit symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, an operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time) and the like, resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, when the power-off signal is not ON, or when the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are normally maintained (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data relating to the effect control at the time of power failure such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, at the time of power-on (when power is restored) after power is restored after a power failure such as a power failure, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, the interrupt is prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random number for variable effect determination that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for announcement effect determination that determines the announcement effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the method of updating the random numbers performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added not by one but by two. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing may be, for example, when a control signal (start-in ball command) notifying that a start ball has been received is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of change from the main control board 80) (A change start command) is transmitted, or a change effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. The command is transmitted to the control board which is the corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command performs various effects using various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to hit games, etc.) are executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of a movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interruption processing (S4008) is processing executed prior to other interruption processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The ramp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch status acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch status acquisition process is executed. A switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a start ball entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). Then, the process proceeds to S4403, and if it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the effect pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The effect pending information storage processing (S4402) is a process for storing various information (pre-judgment result, big hit type determination disturbance) included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball input command or special figure 2 start ball input command) received in S4401. The game information such as a numerical value, a fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) is determined according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the number of special figure reserved balls at the time of transmitting / receiving the start ball entry command (when generating the command). Are stored in a predetermined effect holding information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, when the received start ball entry command is a special figure 1 start ball entry command corresponding to the reserved ball number “4” of the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command And the like are stored as special figure 1 effect suspension information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect suspension information storage area. The effect holding information stored in this manner is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the storage content (acquisition information) of the hold storage unit). For this reason, the effect suspension information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation effect start process (to be described later) ( (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to perform the fluctuation effect. A variable effect ending process for ending is performed (S4406). In the variable effect ending process (S4406), a variable effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variable effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set fluctuating effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect pattern 8 fluctuated on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display is performed, and the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the flow shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending processing. In addition, the fluctuation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing a hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (the occurrence of a big hit) ), A round start command transmitted at the start of the round, a round end command transmitted at the end of the round, an ending command transmitted at the end of the big hit game, a first winning port in the round game The first large winning opening ball entry command transmitted based on the ball entering the 30 and the second large winning opening ball entering command transmitted based on the ball entering the second large winning opening in the small hitting game, etc. are applicable. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to execution of an effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. A round effect command specifying a round effect according to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the ending command, an ending effect specifying an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a special winning opening ball entry command (a first special winning opening ball entering command, a second special winning opening ball entering command), a special winning opening (first large winning opening) specified based on the command is received. A ball entry effect command designating a ball entry effect corresponding to the entry into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the opening effect and the round in accordance with the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol change start command or a normal symbol change stop command) except for the above-described various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start processing (S4402) executed in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers, such as a variation effect determination random number, a preview effect determination random number, and an effect design determination random number, is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the change start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Based on the obtained value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for specifying the current game state, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. A result, symbol information for designating a jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since the variation pattern specification command includes a command corresponding to the first special symbol and a command corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect design game effect to be started this time. It is possible to determine whether the (display of the variation of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the fluctuation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is one of values from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status “1” corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status “2” corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status “3” corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status “4”. The mode status "5" corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the effect mode E. The current production mode can be specified by referring to the current mode status.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of the effect mainly based on the image display device 7. If the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as a notice effect or a reach effect is different. . Specifically, an image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the effect mode, such as a different aspect of the effect symbol 8 (for example, a design design, a number design, and the like), a different character, an item, and a different background image. It is different. In addition, it is also possible to perform the stage design game production in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when controlled to the low-accuracy low-base state, and the effect modes C and D are executed when controlled to the high-accuracy low-base state. Is executed when the vehicle is controlled to the low-probability-high base state and when the vehicle is controlled to the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low-probability low-base state or the high-probability low-base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low-precision high base state or the high-precision high base state. is there. In that sense, effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, this is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like, and is a pattern of a variable effect (variable effect pattern, effect design) controlled mainly by the sub-control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining a game effect are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variable production pattern determination table and a preview production determination table to be used are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of announcement effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. I do. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is “P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), a fluctuation effect pattern determination table may be used as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table when a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. A fluctuation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the change mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and includes a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode statuses) corresponding to the effect modes (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the fluctuation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a fluctuation effect pattern suitable for the specified fluctuation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the fluctuating effect pattern, a fluctuating mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect, when a reach effect is performed (reach effect effect game effect) or when a character effect is performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the effect is not executed (reach-less effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. Note that the reach effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination indicates a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (Zoro eyes). In the case where a certain mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) in a symbol (same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode. ), And whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol (three identical effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one continues to fluctuate (scroll display). Refers to a production that indicates At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of the big hit and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

  In S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), an effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is a result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment, which is out of reach, and in the case of reach out, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" One of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols, and at least one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is out of reach without any reach. It is said that the design pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in accordance with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. In this announcement effect, the effect (beforehand, before the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) (during display of the variation of the effect symbol)) indicating the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner. Information production). In S4506, based on the random number for announcement effect determination acquired in S4501 and the announcement effect determination table set in S4504, a designated variation pattern and an announcement effect suitable for the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), ends the variable effect start processing. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern set in the step (1) is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the fluctuation effect and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, a fluctuation display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of staging design game effects]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 Is displayed on the display screen 7a. An effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8.

  The fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically (in ascending order) in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” ... → “7” → “8” → “9” (in ascending order) ( (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches “9”, it returns to “1” again and repeats vertical scrolling. The manner of the variable display of the effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. For this reason, as for the mode of the variable display, in addition to the vertical scroll, for example, there are various types of display such as a horizontal scroll display (horizontal scroll) and a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variation effect pattern. Further, it is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the mode of the variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

  Further, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display is stopped as the fluctuation time elapses. There are a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of the effect symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is changed to “left symbol”. (2) the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“2nd symbol → right symbol”). And (3) a stop mode (also referred to as a "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped thereafter. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become something. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection and determination (setting) of the fluctuation effect pattern also serves as the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to process the selection / determination (setting) of the fluctuation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "second stop symbol", and the third stop symbol in the stop order. This is also called “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the effect mode C (state C) and the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small”. This is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stopping the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on “hit”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”) based on In the case of D (state C), when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach fluctuation or the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “big hit”, In a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display That.

  The third stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop) is mainly (1) in the effect mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening change according to the number of special figure reserved balls works (at the start of change) Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment is "out", and based on this, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “small hit”. In the case, (3) in the effect modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol correctness determination being “out”, And (4) in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), mainly in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the reach fluctuation based on the reach fluctuation.

  As described above, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided in accordance with the mode of the variable mode based on the effect mode (game state) and the result of the special symbol determination, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the situation of the game and to make it various. Further, for the player, it is possible to estimate a display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) after paying attention to a stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops. It becomes possible, and through the stop mode, it becomes possible to estimate the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game is executed, the possibility, and the like. This allows the player to pay attention to the stop mode at the time when the variable display stops, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol” (fifth stop mode) ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol are substantially the same and the right symbol is stopped thereafter, can be provided. The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, but can be variously determined.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so as to be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to a gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), among the odd symbols, “7” is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and the other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5”, and “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue symbols”). Pattern). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd symbols, “3”, “5” and “7” are red symbols, and the other odd symbols are “1” and “9”. Is a green symbol, and even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

  It should be noted that the correspondence between the symbols and the colors according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondences can be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to the present embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it is also possible to determine the symbol type by elements other than the color. For example, the type of character in the case where a character is attached to the effect design, and the number design in the case of having an effect design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (numeral design) representing a number. The design type may be determined by the character design, or the design type may be simply determined by the odd design and the even design.

  The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), “completely disjointed eyes” (“124” and the like) in which all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numerals), and rendering symbols 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number) and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (numerical symbol) from the others. ) Is a non-specified mode (non-specific mode) that does not serve as an opportunity to execute a winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro eyes” (“777” or the like) in which all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same are defined as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). I have.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the “reach variation” among the variations is also used as a 2R jackpot mode which is a trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player (the number of acquired prize balls) in the 2R jackpot game is smaller than that in the 4R or larger jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high) A special game serving as a trigger for setting a state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) in a small hit game as compared to the low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game in which the degree of advantage (profit amount) is relatively low. In addition, the “perfect variation” among the variations is also used as a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the period, and therefore, the small winning big prize winning port (the second starting port) located downstream of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit profit can be obtained (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the variations, a “specific variation” to be described later is a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing a small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). Here, the small hitting mode (specific breakup) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hitting mode (zorrow) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eyes, the reach-disordered eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the complete disassembly among the departures (completely disparate or reach-disordered) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Since the state A (low-probability low-base state) is a game state based on a left-handed game, it is mainly determined whether or not the first special symbol is accepted (variable display of the first special symbol). It is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (the change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in such a situation, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. When the effect is performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding thereto is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the variable display (and the stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. I have. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states based on performing a right-handed game, mainly the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (the second special symbol judgment) This is because it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol fluctuation display) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed below, the corresponding variation display of the effect symbol 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect indicator 102 ( And stop display) only. However, if a special symbol hit / fail judgment that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made and a “big hit” judgment result is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit / no-go judgment is made in state C) When a big hit is performed), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the big hit. Do. Thereby, while the effect display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variable display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol is displayed in parallel with the variable display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol to be played is a big hit. Further, by suggesting the occurrence of the big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity of obtaining the profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability low-base state). The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). . For this reason, the setting of the effect mode in the state A cannot involve the player.

  Further, in the state A, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “3”, “5”, which are green symbols. A symbol “9” and a symbol “7” including a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the effect mode and the symbol type (see FIG. 54A), the variable display is basically in the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIG. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)). When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), the operation is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and thereafter, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C) changes and displays. Until the stop, a reach effect is executed on an image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect mainly showing whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped earlier (whether the big hit mode is displayed or not) is developed. The reach establishment and the reach effect are the same in the states B and C.

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a variable manner, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a staggered pattern (a complete staggered pattern or a reach staggered pattern) as a result of the fluctuation display, the result is “out of range”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 4R jackpot according to the first special symbol. And when the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends is state C (high-precision low base state), and is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state B (low-precision high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[State B game play]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state B (the low-probability base state or the high-probability base state). The high-accuracy high-basis state is set after the end of the big-hit game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in state C (high-accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a state where the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed along with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

  In the state B, the effect symbols 8 are "2", "4", "6", "8", which are blue symbols, "1", "9", which are green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed. In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the effect mode and the symbol type (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variable display is basically performed in the third stop mode. (Simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). In the state B, the second special symbol time-saving function and the high-base generating function are activated, so that the variation without the reach and the variation of the small hit can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. That's why. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) as soon as the stop is performed. I will not insult you. On the other hand, when the out-of-reach fluctuation or the jackpot fluctuation with reach (that is, “reach fluctuation”) is performed, the “reach-influenced off-period fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach), which is actually a normal fluctuation imitating the reach fluctuation, is performed. In this case, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (variable eyes) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. In the state B, the big hit game when the design symbol 8 is displayed in the big jackpot mode is “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. A jackpot game effect for three big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the 2R jackpot jackpot game effect with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit in the state B, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. You. Then, as a result of the fluctuation display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When the small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed. However, even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). No. 8 is displayed with complete disjointed eyes), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equal to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting game remains in the state B as long as the timing does not overlap with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In the case where the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without generating a big hit in the low-probability high-base state which is the state B. Upon the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (out-of-range fluctuation), the gaming state shifts to state A (low-probability low-base state), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". I do. In addition, when the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit occurring in the state B of the high-accuracy high base state, The game state shifts to state C (high-accuracy low-base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (out-of-range fluctuation), and the effect mode shifts from “E” to “C” or “D”. .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to state C (high-accuracy low-base state). The game effect performed in the state C mainly includes an effect design game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, and a small hit occurrence. (Small hit game production). The state C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which small hits frequently occur until the next big hit occurs, so that many prize balls can be obtained by the small hits between the big hits. For this reason, in state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details on this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed in a state where the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) in the same manner as in the state A and the state B, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. The player can operate the first effect button 63a to select an effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “9”, which are green symbols. ”And the symbols“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 7 ”, which are red symbols, are displayed (see FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same between the state B and the state C.

  Here, between the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D” in the state C, the contents of the game effects (effect specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different. . Therefore, hereinafter, the game effects in each of the effect modes will be described separately for the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, an effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8, as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and are displayed so that both characters face each other. These characters are displayed even when the symbol display is not changed. Each of the ally character and the enemy character has a plurality of types of characters. One of the ally character (also referred to as an “ally character”) and one of the enemy characters (also referred to as an “enemy character”) are in the effect mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that a friendly character attacks an enemy character, or a friendly character is attacked by an enemy character. The effect by such a character (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when performed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information), and when the result of the variable display is a small hit, the small hit game is performed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed along with a special game after the end of the fluctuation display).

  A right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed operation is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The displayed winning ball count image C1 is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying five-digit numbers of “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. The prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (acquired prize balls) obtained by the player through a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is state B or state When it becomes C, it indicates the number of acquired prize balls during the period (so-called acquired prize balls during the extended holiday period) until the game state returns to state A (except during the jackpot game). . In state C (high-accuracy low-base state), a small hit occurs frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases). Therefore, the prize ball acquisition (increase in possession ball) in the small hit game is performed. The prize ball count image C1 is displayed in order to produce the effect. That is, as the small hit game effect, an effect display (entering ball effect) based on the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of a basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration. In FIG. 57, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holding (holding design), right-handed instruction image M, background and the like are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so that the variation without the reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (pumping effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out-of-range or big hit) or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being “small hit”, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → (Right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (variable eyes) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. The big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C in the state C is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this case, for the 15R third big hit Jackpot game effect or the jackpot game effect for the 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the 2R jackpot jackpot game effect with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. As the big hit game effect in this case, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display indicating the end of the advantageous state where small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, in the effect mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the small hit, the fluctuation display is performed with the normal fluctuation and the first fluctuation is performed. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hitting mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols are the same among the three symbols, and the other symbol is different (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) are set as a specific irregularity (small hit mode). Although a symbol combination that constitutes a specific jumbled eye (small hitting mode) does not reach the reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number). Is also referred to as a “reach sequence”.

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") constituting the specific disjointed eyes (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute the specific disjointed eyes in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be performed, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific jiggle (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the design type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol, and to attract interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) which are green symbols in the state A, and a specific irregularity (first (Display mode) is a red symbol, for example, a part of the effect symbol ("2", "4", "6", "8") which is a blue symbol in the state A is a red symbol. Effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue symbols in state A and effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”) that are green symbols , "9") (e.g., "4" and "5") can also be made red. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C which does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific jiggle (first display mode) may be configured by the symbols belonging to the exclusive symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) is provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the pattern types that can constitute a specific disjointed eye stand out more, and to easily attract the player's attention. Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the symbol “7” which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning may be configured as a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can constitute a specific Barracuda, and the symbol “7” that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) May be a 15R jackpot mode (the “7” zoro pattern) corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific varnish eye (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific zoro eye (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished from each other. It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the fluctuation display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol → In the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped. For this reason, not only the small hitting mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also the stop mode of the variable display which triggers the display of the small hitting mode attracts the player's attention. Further, in the effect mode C, at the time of derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the fluctuation display), an effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol And an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating the image. Thereby, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. Can be enhanced. Incidentally, the mode of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other modes can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hitting game executed in response to the display of the small hitting mode, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is entered for each ball. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the prize balls based on the ball entry into the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entry, and thus the acquired prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of ten. Further, when the small hit game is executed in response to the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a with the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as a "first effect") in which one of the ally characters and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or tackles the other (for example, the enemy character) And The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a later-described battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning port (second big winning port 35) for the small hit, and the opening time of the second big winning port 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character production in accordance with the small hit game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character production and the character production performed as a fluctuation production described later as a relevant production, and from the fluctuation display. In the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity by the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 due to the small hit is based on the second large prize opening ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large prize opening sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the control unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these effects are performed, each of these effects corresponds to a small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop of the effect symbol 8 in the first stop mode and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) frequently occur, and accordingly, the small hit game is performed. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, the cooperation between the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect strongly influences the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to impress. As a result, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for winning a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode C (state C). In addition, the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 in the small hitting game, the character effect is not performed, so that the entering ball when the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35 It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of swing or big hit) or the reach-influenced out-of-reach fluctuation is performed in the effect mode C. As described above, in the effect mode C, in the state where the ally character (the first character) and the enemy character (the second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol game effect (the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8, etc.). ) Is performed (see FIG. 56A). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (out-of-range or big hit) is performed and in the case where the reach-out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → medium symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In such a situation, when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the fluctuation effect pattern of the reach fluctuation or the reach swaying fluctuation, the left symbol (the effect symbol 8L) is first stopped according to the second stop mode. However, when the left symbol (the first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent. (1st production) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first production is roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character attacks the enemy character (also referred to as a “first production pattern A”) and a pattern in which the enemy character attacks the ally character (“ There are two patterns, which are also referred to as “first effect pattern B”). Further, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns each defining the content (type) of the attack to be performed and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested by the contents of the effect when the first effect is performed (big hit reliability, contents of the effect that can be executed later, etc.). (Notice). Note that the first effect is an effect that ends when one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other, and does not include a battle effect described later.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as a “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a friendly character attacks), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the change display. That is, it is indicated that the big hit which is the end trigger of the state C which is the advantageous state in which the small hit frequently occurs does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluctuating fluctuation), reach is established and developed into reach production, but finally the middle design stops at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 is displayed with a reach pattern (outer form) The effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag manner (big hit mode) after reaching reach deviation (fluctuation of fluctuation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (a pattern in which an enemy character attacks), the 2R big hit mode which is the end trigger of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluttering deviation fluctuation), although reach was established and developed into reach production, finally the middle design stopped at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 was in the reach pattern (outside or 2R big hit) It is displayed (reach out-of-reach fluctuation or 2R big-hit fluctuation), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a zigzag (big-hit state) after reaching reach (big-hit fluctuation). As described above, the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol) allows the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach has been established, whether or not the development is advantageous for the player, and the like). It is possible to suggest. Then, the first effect pattern A suggests that it is more likely that the subsequent development will be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern. According to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505, the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns. It is decided what to do.

  After the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) stops in this way (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established. Then, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the staging symbol 8 is displayed. It is displayed in a complete disjointed pattern (out of form). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation which is out of reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as a “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect) and the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is still changing. In this embodiment, this is performed as a battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character displayed as a background. The second production (battle production) can be roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character wins a battle (a battle) (also referred to as a “second production pattern A”) and a pattern in which an ally character loses a battle (a battle). (Also referred to as a “second production pattern B”) and a pattern (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”) that ends the battle without losing a win or loss (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”). There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of the character that strikes first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (such as the reliability of a big hit) on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) based on the content of the performance when the second performance (battle performance) is performed. I have.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as “second effect pattern”), the second effect pattern A (the ally victory pattern) is such that the ally character makes a first strike. There is a pattern where the player wins as it is, or a pattern where the enemy character strikes first and the ally character finally wins. Further, in the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which an enemy character makes a first strike and a friend character is defeated. Further, the second production pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) includes a pattern in which an ally character performs a preemptive attack but an enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which an enemy character performs a preemptive attack and an ally character withstands the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of an ally character or an enemy character, and the production contents (battle production) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes, etc.) are predetermined in accordance with each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern. According to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505, the second effect (battle) is selected from any of a plurality of patterns. Direction) is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot), that is, When the effect design 8 is displayed with a double eye (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (the ally victory pattern) Direction) is performed. In this case, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the big hit mode), the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed, and after the big hit game, the gaming state becomes the state C (highly accurate low base state) again. Therefore, after the big hit game, the player can again play the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur. As described above, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the friend character wins.

  Also, when the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol right / wrong judgment being a deviation, that is, the effect pattern 8 is displayed as a fluctuation display as a result of the fluctuation display. When displayed in the eyes (missing state), a second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the outlier mode (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the stop of the variable display (after the display of the disengagement mode). Since the game in the state C continues as described above, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the battle (battle) ends without a win or loss.

  Further, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots), that is, the variation When the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation (2R big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derivation display), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the 2R big hit mode), the big hit game of 2R is performed, and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, the player ends the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur, triggered by the occurrence of the 2R big hit. As described above, since the gaming state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

  Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the contents in which the ally character makes the first strike are the second effect pattern A (the ally winning pattern) and the second effect pattern C (the winning / losing undetermined pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is the first character of the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred at that time that there is no possibility of at least a 2R jackpot, that is, a possibility of ending the state C. On the other hand, since the patterns including the content of the enemy character performing the first strike correspond to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the formation, and the confrontation (battle) in that battle production starts with the enemy character's first strike, the possibility of a 2R jackpot at that point (possible termination of state C) Gender) cannot be ruled out. Then, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, and the fluctuation is 2R hit. That is, the game in the state C is ended. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins after the enemy character's first strike and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A, The fluctuation is a 15R or 4R big hit fluctuation, and when the ally character evades the preemptive attack of the enemy character and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern C Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in each of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. As described above, in the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur continues (win, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a staging effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the fluctuating production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the production mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 has a smaller size (reduced size) in the upper right of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 as compared to other effect modes such as the effect mode C. A main image X imitating a fighter is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D adopting such a screen configuration, the effect display mainly showing a state in which the fighter plane flies is developed on the display screen 7a while normally displaying the change of the effect symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. Has become something. Then, when the reach is changed, the effect design 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after reaching, a predetermined reach effect (e.g., an advanced effect) is displayed on substantially the entire display screen. It is executable by using. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. It is possible. In addition, in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right strike instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, also in FIG. 58, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holdings (holding symbols) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, usually, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the symbol is not changed. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the fluctuation display is basically performed in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of a normal fluctuation (off or small hit). The operation is stopped (see FIG. 58B). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as in the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner at the upper right of the display screen 7a, the variation display mode is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect design 8 which has been displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen until then is displayed. The display is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen 7a, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left / right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be changed (scrolled).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (variable eyes) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eye) as a result of the fluctuation display, the 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed, and when the display symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (Reach hit), the 2R big hit game can be executed. Becomes The effects during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Also, in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and when the change display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result, the change display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. And is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58B). At this time, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific pattern (small hitting mode) as a result of the variable display (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the fluctuation display accompanying the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in the other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect symbol 8 is mainly displayed to emphasize the occurrence of small hits. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, the effect design 8 is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific pattern (small hit mode), so that the occurrence of the small hit in the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is not obvious. In this case, the effect is performed in an inconspicuous manner. At this time, an effect image different from the effect symbol 8 can be displayed, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) to the player that a small hit has occurred. It is assumed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 59A, a plurality of target images Y can be displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit change. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning opening 35 in one small hitting game. In the present embodiment, the target image Y is approximately 2 per small hitting game. Since three to three game balls are designed to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed corresponding to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the fluctuating effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect), and in S4505, the fluctuating effect pattern including the display of the target image Y (small effect for the effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can also be said to be an announcement effect image for announcing occurrence of a small hit. Note that the display of the target image Y may not be included in the variable effect pattern, but may be included in the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above.

  Then, when the small hit change (the change display of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode ("355" or the like) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize to be opened by the small hit game is started. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as a "destructive effect") indicating a state in which the target image Y is destroyed for each incoming ball is performed (see FIG. 59B). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. And it corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from the fighter (the main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of the small hit change to the small hit game is a basic effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. In addition to this, in the effect mode D, the effect related to the small hit is as described above. An effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called “hold prefetch effect” is performed. The reserved prefetch effect relating to the small hit (also referred to as “small hit prefetch effect”) is realized by the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 when starting the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D. Specifically, at the time of setting (S4505) of the variable effect pattern in the above-described variable effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetch effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, special productions will be held for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is stored as the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol holding), and the second special symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not a hold that results in a small hit (also referred to as “small hit hold”) is stored (S5002). This determination is made with reference to the effect holding information (preliminary judgment result and the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the storage contents of the effect holding information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit hold, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change display of the effect symbol 8 to be started (also referred to as “the change”) (S5002). The small hit holding is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined that the change has been made (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not small hits occur three or more times consecutively as a result of the change display including the change (the change display to be started from now on) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the fluctuation (S5003). This determination can also be made with reference to the effect suspension information (storage contents of the effect suspension information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are not stored consecutively (NO in S5003), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous announcement) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, if the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect involving the display of a plurality (three in this example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). In other words, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect indicating the occurrence of a small hit due to the change (the change notice).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect relating to a small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in succession, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more continuous fluctuation displays. (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs a start time lottery (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific time period. (S5004: YES), the process of S5005 to S5007 for starting the specific period is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if two conditions of (1) that three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions of the specific period.

  If it is determined in S5004 that the specific period is to be started (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned on (S5006), and the small hit prefetch effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not to be started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit holdings determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, “3” or “4” is set (S5005). After the specific period counter is set in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) stops (ends). The specific period flag is a flag indicating that a specific period is currently in progress, and is mainly used at the start of a variable effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the occurrence of a second special figure hold (special figure 2 start ball-in command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to at the time of storage of the production suspension information based on () (S4402). After being turned on in S5006, the specific period flag is turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

  In the present embodiment, when three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether to set the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of a positive determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetch effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit prefetch effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit prefetch effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is sent to the image control board 100. Then, the small hit prefetch effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, along with the start of the change display of the effect symbol 8 (the first small hit change). The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is not displayed, and the characters “Get continuous GET !!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  Thereafter, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T () displaying the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of acquired prize balls during the specific period. The second display section) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61B). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying three-digit numbers of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time one game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed in response to the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for one of the entered balls The prize ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is: It is displayed in addition to the prize ball count image C2 (acquired prize ball number) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). Also, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second winning hole 35 but also the third starting port 26, the prize ball paid out for each entry (each entry). An award ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is award ball count image. It is displayed in addition to C2 (the number of acquired prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). Accordingly, during the specific period, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are easily performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entering ball effect. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are performed by the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third starting port sensor 26a and the second winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning port ball entry command) by the sub-control unit 90 (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 can occur not only during the small hitting game, the display of the prize ball number image S based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 are performed. The display can also be executed as an effect during the variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. During the specific period, addition display of the winning ball count image C1 displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display unit) is not performed. This indicates the number of acquired prize balls during a specific period (during the small hit casino period) in which the small hit game is continuously performed three or more times, in distinction from the number of acquired prize balls obtained by the small hit game when not in the specific period. That's why.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above correspond to all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (in this embodiment, three or four small hit holdings). ) Is performed until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit holdings are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T which has been displayed is erased from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the acquired prize ball number indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). Is performed (added) to the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in (1) (see FIG. 61 (e) → (f)). According to the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A, the effect effect (first profit effect, second profit effect) is produced by changing the display mode of the acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount). The effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the effect display mode based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the prize ball number image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. However, for example, the specific period display area T is displayed in a landscape orientation near the upper left on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. For example, various display modes can be adopted.

  On the other hand, if the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and an effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit pre-reading effect pattern B is performed, with the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (small hit fluctuation), A plurality of the target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening with the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (three or four) stored at the time when the variable display is started. 35 is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59A), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. In other words, the number of target images Y to be displayed (the effect mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the stored number of small hit holdings. Due to the display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display performed continuously a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display becomes a small hit (specific display result). Continuous occurrence of hits) can be suggested to the player. Thereafter, while the small hit game is performed by the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit reservations at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35, A destructive effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destructive effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter directly indicating the stored number of small hits held is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second large winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed during the effect of updating based on the small hit change based on the small hit holding, and the display mode of the character image (such as the movement of the character) is changed to the second special winning opening 35. Various effects, such as effects that change based on the entry of a ball, can be set as predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display using the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56B), small hits frequently occur, and the ball enters the second big winning opening 35. (First profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed at a high frequency, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the effect related to the small hit and to improve the game entertainment. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit holdings ("3" or more in the present embodiment), when the specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of the small hit pre-reading effect, the The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) are performed until all the small hit holdings are exhausted and the specific period ends. It is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. After the end of the specific period, the number of acquired prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls during the specific period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is the prize originally displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). It is added (added) to the number of winning prizes in the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where a plurality of small hits are held ("3" or more in this embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of the small hit prefetching effect. (A small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of target images Y displayed in the present embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, and the like) executed in accordance with the small hit, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (missing or big hit) and the reach-inducing variation occur in the effect mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. (Variation display, etc.) are performed (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 58 (a)). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) is performed and in the case where the reach out of place change is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect design 8, and until then, the main image X is displayed in the upper right of the screen. The displayed effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen and is displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling. Thereafter, the fluctuating display of the effect symbol 8 is switched to the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth symbol. It stops in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and subsequent figures). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined value is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is performed based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above, in which the friend character and the enemy character are connected. This is a battle effect (showdown effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and includes a plurality of third effect patterns having different patterns of the content of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly classified into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as “third effect pattern A”) and a ally character. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as a “third effect pattern B”) and a pattern in which the battle ends without a win or loss (also referred to as a “third effect pattern C”). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of the enemy character, the type of the character performing the first strike, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (friend win pattern) is also referred to as a “first change effect pattern”, and the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is also referred to as a “second change effect pattern”. The effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as “third variable effect pattern”. In addition, the third effect (battle effect) pattern includes a strong attack pattern (for example, the type of weapon or technique used in the attack) of each of the ally character and the enemy character. A strong attack pattern) and a weak attack power (also called a "weak pattern"). In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which the ally character attacks the enemy character, the strong pattern (also referred to as the “strong ally pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to the weak pattern (also referred to as the “friendly ally pattern”). It is shown that it is high. Also, among the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also referred to as an “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than a weak pattern (also referred to as an “enemy weak pattern”). It is intended to indicate that. With these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the development and results of the battle effect to the player.

  In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach-lifting fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D, an image for giving a notice (suggestion) of the content of a subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the change (also referred to as a “advance image”). (See FIG. 65). The display of the preview image is a kind of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in the above-described S4506 according to the fluctuating effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-described S4505. When a notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the notice image is selected (set) on the basis of the effect determination table (not shown), a predetermined value is set when executing the variable display (variable effect). Is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the preview image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the mode of the advance announcement effect (announcement effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the preview image due to the fluctuation of the reach deviation is determined from the start of the fluctuation display to the time when the reach is not established (reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol stops). . The reason is that reach cannot be established with fluctuations in reach. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the preview image in the case of the fluctuation in reach reach is set to the start of the fluctuation display. The display of the preview image allows the player to infer the development of the game that can be executed after the change. The display of the preview image may not be based on the preview effect pattern but may be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. In addition, the notice image can be referred to as “information about the game after the end of the fluctuation display”, and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when a preview image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65A, a lower portion of the display screen 7a is a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R), which are stopped due to the reaching of the reach, are displayed small in the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, respectively. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that gives a preview (suggestion) of the occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for informing (suggesting) the continuation of the production mode D (state C), and a notice (suggestion) for transition to the production mode E (state B). And a third notice image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of the display of the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding a later game development, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Also, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of the notice image enables the effect mode D (state C). ) Will be announced (suggested) about the game development based on the game described in (1), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the effect mode D (state C). Note that the mode (display position, size, shape, and the like) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 65. For example, the landscape preview image display area U illustrated in FIG. Or a vertically long preview image display area U is provided on the left or right portion of the display screen 7a, and the first to third preview images are vertically (up and down) in the preview image display area U. Various modes can be adopted, such as being able to be displayed side by side.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continuation”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters of “mode E”. Is done. In this embodiment, when displaying a preview image, two types of preview images are displayed. As a display pattern (combination of a preview image), that is, a preview effect pattern, a “first preview image 501” illustrated in FIG. And a second notice image 502 ”and a second display pattern that displays the“ second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 ”shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition, a display pattern for displaying the “first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503” may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, three kinds of notice images are provided. More kinds of notice images may be provided, such as providing notice images according to the type of the big hit. In this case as well, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (notification effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is to be displayed depends on the type of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when the reach-off-shift variation is performed (reach-off shift variation effect pattern), the first advance notice image 501 and the second advance notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second advance notice image 502 from the start of the variation. The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R). The process is performed until the reach is not established. Then, after the start of the display of the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), if the reach is not established, the preview image that has been displayed up to that point is deleted from the screen. In this case, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern when displaying the preview image is performed by setting the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is performed based on a display pattern determining random number that takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selectivity of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach-floating variation, both the display of the preview image using the first display pattern and the display of the preview image using the second display pattern can be executed. The latter is more likely to be executed than the latter (selection rate of the first display pattern “30%”, selectivity of the second display pattern “70%”).

  On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation production pattern), the variation is a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). In other words, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag (big hit manner) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation effect pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit manner is displayed (before the derived display). A third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend win pattern) is performed. In addition, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game is performed, and thereafter, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (the first fluctuation effect pattern) This is a pattern in which allied characters win. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), for example, at the predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or when a reach is established, the display of the preview image (information display effect) Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first advance notice image 501 and the second advance notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player determines at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be assumed that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is no possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), at that time, the player has a 2R big hit. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that the later game development becomes disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect to win the ally) based on the third effect pattern A due to the big hit change is displayed by the first display pattern more than the second display pattern. The possibility of execution with the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern is higher than the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in that the degree of expectation of the teammate victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect design 8 is displayed in a big hit mode and the big hit. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) that the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “strong friendship pattern” with the big hit change, the possibility of displaying the preview image using the first display pattern is increased. (See FIG. 66).

  When the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is a “strong friend pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of the display of the preview image (for example, a friend character and an enemy character) At a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of a character battle, during a battle, or the like), the first preview image 501 (big hit) may be displayed larger in the preview image display area U than at the beginning of the display. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the preview image is based on the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above. When the preview effect pattern including the enlarged display of the preview image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the preview image is displayed. Done. Further, with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed in a smaller size than at the beginning of the display or is deleted (deleted in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. Thereby, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the strong ally pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the variation (battle effect). It is possible to suggest to the player that the score is high, and to enhance the player's sense of expectation and security. When the first notice image 501 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the second notice image 502 is deleted, it is possible to use the display to notify the big hit decision (big hit decision notification). Further, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the notice image display area is displayed, such as further enlarging the first notice image 501 and deleting the second notice image 502. The display mode of the preview image displayed on U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the character of “big hit” in the first preview image 501 may be changed to “super-big hit” indicating a 15R big hit, or the character of “big hit” and its background color may be changed. For example, the characters, colors, shapes, and the like constituting the preview image may be changed. Further, the change of characters and the like and the change of the display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be configured to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “strong ally pattern”, that is, the “low ally pattern”, the “strong enemy pattern”, or the “weak enemy pattern”, In any of these three patterns, the enlarged display of the first preview image 501 is not performed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. It should be noted that even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “strong friend pattern”, the first preview image 501 can be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the “strong friend pattern” is used. It is only necessary to lower the possibility of performing the enlarged display (change of the display mode) as compared with. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

  Also, when reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), and the fluctuation is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, ie, In the case where the effect symbol 8 is displayed with a reach variation (out-of-reach mode) as a result of the fluctuation display (reach out-of-reach fluctuation effect pattern), before the display of the out-of-way mode (before the derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win / loss is not obtained) A third effect (a fluctuating effect based on the third fluctuating effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the departure mode), the third effect pattern C (third fluctuation effect pattern) is confronted without a win or loss (battle). It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the fluctuation (out-of-reach fluctuation), the first advance notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 are displayed at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or at the time of reaching a reach. The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed using the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of generating at least a 2R jackpot (the possibility of ending the state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed by the second display pattern, the player is unlikely to generate at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). I can guess that. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect based on the third effect pattern C (the battle effect of undecided winning or losing) is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation, the first display pattern and the second display The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, and thus the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player the anxiety of getting lost. On the other hand, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern (continuation or staging mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that the 2R jackpot occurs, and the game in the state C cannot be continued. Since it also includes sex, such anxiety is given to the player. The display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are deleted (change in the display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that the game in the state C is continuously performed without a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) being generated as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). Can be. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) is finally left in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, the big hit mode is not displayed (the big hit occurs) as a result of the fluctuation display. Therefore, the first preview image as described above is displayed by displaying the preview image in the first display pattern. The enlarged display 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, after the display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern is started, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executed. The second advance notice image 502 is an advance notice image that gives advance notice (suggestion) of the continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur, and the enlarged display of the second advance notice image 502 does not provide the player with a profit due to the occurrence of the big hit. Since the continuation possibility of the state C is notified (suggested) in advance, it is possible to ease anxiety of the player that the game in the state C ends.

  In the case where reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), the fluctuation is based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a 2R big hit (2R fifth to eighth big hit). When the change is performed as a 2R jackpot change, that is, when the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation eye (2R jackpot change effect pattern) as a result of the change display (2R jackpot change effect pattern), before the display of the 2R jackpot change mode (before derivation display) ), A third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is performed. After the fluctuation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 2R is performed, the game state after the big hit game becomes state B (high base state), and the game in state C is continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated. Then, in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or at the time of reaching, at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, the second notice image 502 and the second Display of the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player infers that there is a possibility of a 2R big hit (the possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect of ally defeating) based on the third effect pattern B is executed with the 2R big hit variation is not executed in the first display pattern. This is executed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C is terminated by the occurrence of the 2R big hit despite the display of the preview image by the first display pattern (the preview effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development) (relative game). This is because it is severe for the player. By doing so, the display of the preview image and the third effect (battle effect) are coordinated, and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect), the player feels discomfort and distrust. It is possible not to give a feeling.

  Thereafter, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change of the notice image display mode). As a result, the player recognizes that two big hits (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in state C has come to an end. it can. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the effect mode D, when the reach fluctuation or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the contents (game development) of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation are announced (suggested) based on the fluctuation effect pattern related to the fluctuation. The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U). This notice image includes a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives notice (suggestion) of occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state). And a second advance notice image 502 (second information) for announcing (suggesting) the continuation of the state C, and announcing (suggesting) that the gaming state shifts to the state B (the end of the game in the state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ), A third preview image 503 (third information), and a display pattern of these preview images includes a first display pattern including a combination of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502, and a second preview image. There is a second display pattern composed of a combination of 502 and a third preview image 503. The display of the preview image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is a third effect from the start of the fluctuation before the reach uncertainty is determined at the start of the fluctuation, and from the start of the fluctuation at the reach fluctuation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of the (battle effect) becomes clear (before the end of the battle effect or the change), state C (advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur) continues due to the change (victory) Thus, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety, such as whether the game is undecided or ended (defeated). Further, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) (such as a strong ally pattern or a weakly ally pattern) in the fluctuation, the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. At a predetermined time in the middle (during a battle effect), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and indicates at an early stage before the end of the change that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player, This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode in the state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low-base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the effect mode to be set is selected. Is performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit occurs which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are the big hits that trigger the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The effect modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the big hit game can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The occurrence timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period differs between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. Note that the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs control processing related to effect mode selection, such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of an effect mode based on operation of the first effect button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as an initial hit, Mode selection when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and “4R fourth big hit” occurs, that is, when “4R fourth big hit” occurs as a connected suite The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game have been completed. Here, as described above, when the last round of the jackpot game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command and (S2116), the big hit ending period starts (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of big hit. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In the present embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is set to “15 seconds”, and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is set to “5 seconds”. Seconds ". Note that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, an ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode C selection image”) indicating “effect mode C” and an image 702 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode D selection image”) indicating “effect mode D”. Are arranged side by side on the right and left, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as a “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right sides. By displaying such a mode selection screen 700, the player is notified that the mode selection period is being performed.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, an image 701 (mode C selection image) and an image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is indicated as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, the mode selection image (production mode) being selected is displayed (highlighted) as a mode surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (production mode) is displayed dark (dark display). I have. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, and selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high-accuracy low-base state). can do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started above the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numerical image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 from “3” → “2” → “1”. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the number image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, thereby ending the mode selection period. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as an effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). Under the effect design game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and the “15R third big hit” occurs in the state B or C (right-handed game), that is, the “15R third big hit” occurs as the extended villa. In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R among 1R to 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , The sub control unit can recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a “13R start command” that designates the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of the 13R, Is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, a 13R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (14R in this embodiment) (a notification before the start of the selection period, a first notification unit). As described above, after the user is notified in advance that the selection of the effect mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the effect of the effect mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the effect mode selection period is reached. Selection is possible. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection.

  Note that the round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, an award ball count image C1, and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each ball entered based on the ball entry into the first large winning opening 30 during reception of the big hit game (reception of the first large winning opening ball entry command). This is continuously displayed even in the state C after the big hit game is completed, and thereafter, the ball is entered into the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game or the first big game in the big hit game. Addition and display are also performed when a ball enters the winning opening 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of obtained prize balls during the extended period from the initial hit.

  Next, when receiving the “14R start command” designating the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). I do. In response to this, a 14R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63B, the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above. I have. By the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode is being selected (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upside-down switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and (b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection in the 14R will be omitted. The screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed during the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode may be displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when receiving the “15R start command” designating the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (the image control unit). ). In response to this, a 15R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, a countdown display starts at the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62 (c)), and the numerical image changes from “3” to “2” as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

  Thereafter, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. The selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D) is set. Under the effect symbol game effect is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to the “effect mode C” at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. ”Or“ effect mode D ”occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left-handed game) and a 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the timing of the mode selection period differs between the initial hit in state A, which is a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played, and the continuous hit in state B or C, which is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played. It has become something. In other words, the type of big hit game to be executed (big hit type), that is, 4R big hit game (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit) or 15R big hit game (15R third big hit) , The occurrence time of the mode selection period differs. For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive play) or the type of the big hit game to be executed, the timing at which the effect mode selection becomes possible is changed, It is possible to change the mode.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games are completed, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in 13R before (before start) the mode selection period occurs. Then, a notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period starts from the next round is displayed (notification before the start of the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This is displayed (notification during the selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and a countdown display is executed at 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). As described above, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after all round games have been completed, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the effect mode before all round games have ended. Given to. This makes it possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  Also, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period in the 4R jackpot. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible a negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of acquired prize balls) is small and the execution period of the jackpot game is short as compared with the 15R jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest. Become.

  In the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is prompted to select an effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). I have. For this reason, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. The mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from the start to the end of the mode selection period, a notification (selection period) related to the effect mode selection. Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, and notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are changed according to the game state to a special symbol set as a main player of the game in the game state (a first special symbol or a later-described special symbol). The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). In other words, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. There is a case and a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Also, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the subject of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (subject). And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (other special symbol) which is not the main player of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are both displayed in accordance with the game state and the game situation. One of the effect symbols and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) may be displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, a "variable entrance" which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball, "Special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is in a state in which the variable entrance can be entered when the result of the first hit determination or the second hit determination is a hit. Further, the “second starting port” may be a variable starting port that is changeable between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first mode. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than the game state. (Game state setting means) for setting the state (second game state). Here, the “predetermined frequency” includes 0.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is one, but the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be different, or a round having a different number of times of opening may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing which can be simultaneously varied. However, the control processing in which the second special figure reservation is performed in preference to the first special figure reservation. A so-called special figure 2 priority control processing, a control processing in which the first special figure reservation is performed prior to the second special figure reservation, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control processing may be used. In addition, the priority is not set for the digestion of the first special map reservation and the digestion of the second special map reservation, and the digestion is performed in order from the oldest one of the first special map reservation and the second special map reservation. A control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in memory order) may be used.

  A pachinko gaming machine of a type not provided with a probability setting means (without a high probability state), having a specific area inside, a state in which a game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter. A large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible ball entry state is provided, and the large winning opening is set in a ball entry possible state for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entry into the starting port becomes a small hit. When a game ball enters the special winning opening in a ball possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, the game becomes a big hit, a big hit game is executed, and the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the starting port is increased is given. In addition, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the large hit probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Is also good. Furthermore, a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), and the like. A plurality of types of probability conditions defining a relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball entry, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read, and the read acquired random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Preliminary judgment) is to be performed (“starting ball entry processing (S205)”; see FIGS. 11 and 13), but the method of the preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing the acquisition information to be subjected to the preliminary determination (that is, the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball entry) is provided by the main control unit and the sub control unit. May be provided in the RAM of the unit, and the acquisition information stored in the storage area (the storage unit for the preliminary determination) may be determined (prior determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to delete the acquired information used in the preliminary determination (the acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it is also possible to make a preliminary decision on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, a determination may be made in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure suspension storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reserved storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the preliminary decision. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode D (state C, specific game state), when the specific period is started in a situation where three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period, The display of the number-of-prize-balls image S and the addition display of the prize-ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed based on the ball entering the small winning opening for small hits, and when the specific period ends, the prize is displayed. An effect is performed in which the acquired prize ball number indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (totaled) to the acquired prize ball number (total acquired prize ball number, total acquired prize ball number) of the prize ball count image C1. Had become. On the other hand, when a new second special map reservation (ball entry to the third starting port 26) occurs during the specific period, and the reservation is determined to be the small hit reservation by the preliminary determination (the reservation pre-reading). , The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hits are continuously stored, and two small hits have been consumed after the start. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “2”. In this situation, if a new second special map reservation occurs and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes “3” and the reservation is preliminarily determined to be a small hit reservation, a specific period counter (see S5005) Is incremented by “+1” (1 addition). Thereby, the newly generated (stored) small hit holding is consumed, and the specific period is extended until the small hit game related to the small hit holding is completed. Alternatively, after the specific period is started, two small hits are consumed and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes "2". It is assumed that the second special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls “4” occur in succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “3” is the off-hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “4” is the small hit reserve in advance. Assume that it is determined. In this case, by incrementing the specific period counter (see S5005) by “+2” (addition of 2), the small hit holding corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “4” is consumed, and the small hit change and the small hit game are completed. Until you do so, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period in which the display of the number-of-prize-ball images S and the additional display of the prize-ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) is performed. Because it extends, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, two conditions of (1) that at least three small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the lottery at the start of the specific period are set as two conditions of the start of the specific period. Although the condition has been described, the start condition of the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality (for example, two or more) of small hits that are not continuous are stored, or a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small hits are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. May be used as the start condition of the specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to be generated (started more easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, before the transition to the state C, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C If the big hit is a 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and the 15R big hit (15R No. In the case of three big hits, a mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (start of 14R to halfway of 15R in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the big hit that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, one of 10 rounds, and the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is the state A (left-handed game), the ending period If a mode selection period occurs during the state B or C (right-handed game), the mode selection period may be generated in a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R middle). In the latter case, notification that the mode selection period is to be started from the next round (a notification before the start of the selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. In addition, the occurrence time when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, from the start of 5R to the end of 6R. , Or the last round only, or any other round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the jackpot, a notification that the mode selection period is to be started thereafter (a notification before the start of the selection period) is performed in the round effect of the last round before the start of the ending period. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) during the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, in the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of effect modes determined in advance may be automatically selected by lottery on the sub control side. In this case, for example, at the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, and An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect during the mode selection period (mode selection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, the effect modes in the state C are two types (the effect modes C and D). However, three or more effect modes may be used, and one of the effect modes may be selectable.

  In addition, the effects (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbols shown in the above-described embodiment, and the effect executed in accordance with the small hit in the state C (the effect mode C, D). (A small hit look-ahead effect, a first profit effect, a second profit effect, and the like), a notice effect (display of a notice image) in the effect mode D, a notification screen and a mode selection screen relating to a mode selection period, and the like. The various aspects of the effects are merely examples, and the aspects of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the preview image in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the preview image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display, other display means (effect display device) for effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided, and in the effect mode D using the display means. May be configured to be able to execute a preview effect corresponding to the display of the preview image.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a display unit that performs variable display of identification information and that can execute a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. I have. In this type of gaming machine, the result of the variable display can be shown (notified) to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, JP-A-2008-370).

  In the gaming machine having the above-described display means, the player proceeds with the game by paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player feels tired of the game while the display of the change of the identification information is repeated many times, and it is difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to realize a display in a new mode that attracts the player's interest with respect to the display of identification information, thereby improving the interest in the game. It is to plan.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and is capable of notifying a result of the variable display by a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
A variable display unit capable of performing a variable display of the identification information;
The change display means,
When stopping the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stop mode when stopping the variable display depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display is performed by the variable display means, when the variable display is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. Then, the stop mode can be made different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. For this reason, the player can guess the display mode of the subsequently displayed (derived display) identification information, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable information display is stopped. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the stop mode at the time when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
At least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order, and a stop mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped in the first order are as the stop modes when the change display of the identification information is stopped. A second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode which is a trigger for executing a predetermined special game and a second display which is a trigger for executing another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the identification information is variably displayed by the variably displayed symbols. In such a configuration, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order as the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols. A first stop mode, and a second stop mode that is a second stop sequence different from the first stop sequence (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode which is a trigger for execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode which is a trigger for execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is performed in the first stop order ( It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), and in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. For this reason, the player can guess the kind of the special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game can be executed, the possibility of the special game, and the like, through the stop mode when the change display of the identification information stops. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the change display of the identification information is stopped, and to excite a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, there is further provided a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
As a stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the identification information, a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the change display of the identification information (a plurality of symbols), a special game is further executed. If the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped is the fourth display mode, the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger is provided. In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of a plurality of symbols are substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols. For this reason, in the case where the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the mode in which the variable display is stopped includes a mode in which it is possible to immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game (third mode). Becomes possible. This makes it possible to diversify the stop modes when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being unnecessarily aroused.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
When the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, the fact that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the execution of the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode is emphasized and indicated to the player. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of rendering when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second game state is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is higher in the frequency of the first display mode than the first game mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the identification information is fluctuated and displayed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by the stop of the variable display becomes the first display mode more frequently. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the execution of the display of the first display mode is higher than in the first display mode. For this reason, in the second game state, the frequency of the change display of the identification information stopping in the first stop mode increases. Thereby, in the second game state, the player is paid attention to whether or not the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is raised. It becomes possible to instigate.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-5 described above.
The type of the symbol constituting the identification information has at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is configured by a symbol of a second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are provided as the types of the symbols constituting the identification information, and among the first symbol type and the second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set to the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become something. For this reason, in the first gaming state, a symbol that cannot constitute the first display mode because it is a symbol of the first symbol type changes to a symbol that can constitute the first display mode by entering the second gaming state. Will be done. This allows the player to pay attention to the symbol type as well as the stop mode at the time when the variable display of the identification information stops.

  According to the above-described reference invention 1, it is possible to realize a display in a new mode that attracts the player's interest with respect to the display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter a game ball into a variable entrance (for example, a special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined game profit (for example, a prize ball) is provided to a player based on the game profit. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit provided in response to the entry of a game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit (acquired profit amount) to be obtained by the player is determined by a predetermined value. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

  However, the display of the acquired profit amount as described above is already adopted by many gaming machines, and is an effect lacking in freshness. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect of a novel mode as an effect for displaying an acquired profit amount, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-described problem includes:
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance,
Profit effect execution means capable of executing a profit effect for displaying an obtained profit amount when a game profit is provided by the profit provision means,
State control means capable of controlling a game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect execution means includes, at least, a first profit effect in which an obtained profit amount is added and displayed based on a ball entering the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the first profit effect in a specific period in the specific game state. And a second profit effect in which the obtained profit amount is added and displayed based on the ball entering the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the variable entrance when being controlled to the specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player in response to the ball, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of game profit to be given (acquired profit amount). Is executed during a specific period in the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the profit effect executed based on the ball entry into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect execution means may execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and may execute the first profit effect in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance. When the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the obtained profit amount (the obtained profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding and displaying (summing) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the acquired profit amount during the specific game state to enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of an acquisition condition,
Identification information display means capable of executing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
A preliminary determination unit capable of performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and as a result, it becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in a situation in which it is determined that it is possible to enter the variable entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as an opportunity. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to increase the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The specific period ends when it is possible to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means as an opportunity at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable entrance. After the operation becomes possible, the specific period ends. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 or 2-4 described above,
The advance determination means can execute the advance determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on that a new determination result indicating that the information is specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the advance determination can be performed even during the specific period, and the advance determination is performed on the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the result of the determination is obtained, the specific period is extended. Accordingly, the period during which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on that a determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the obtained information is the specific obtained information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored when the predetermined effect is executed. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the specific game state.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 2, it is possible to realize a novel mode of effect as an effect for displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been widely known gaming machines that perform variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on a display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is a gaming machine of this type that is configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (for example, see Patent Document 1). The time at which the effect mode can be selected can be set at various times, for example, during the change display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (eg, during the big hit game). It is possible. In some configurations in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP-A-2006-174956).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem of lack of freshness. there were. The present invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to select a staging mode after a special game in a new mode, and to improve the game entertainment. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured so that it is possible to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from the plurality of effect modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a first notification unit that performs notification before the start of the selection period in a round game before the predetermined round game is provided. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, a notification before the start of the selection period is made in a round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is informed in advance in the round game before that the effect mode selection is possible in the predetermined round game during the special game (the selection period occurs), and then the effect mode selection period is selected. It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as when an occurrence (start) occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

  Note that the selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, manual selection in which the player selects and inputs any of the effect modes using a predetermined input unit provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. Automatic selection in which either is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a second notification unit for performing notification during the selection period in the predetermined round game,
When the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started, a third notification unit that performs notification before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period ends during a round game in which the notification by the third notification unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when an effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game ends. Is started, in the round game (the next round game after the predetermined round game), the notification before the end of the selection period is performed. The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is made (during the round game following the predetermined round game). For this reason, when the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game, notification before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game (notification by the first notification means) and the predetermined A special game is provided by a notification during the selection period performed in the round game (reporting by the second notification unit) and a notification before the end of the selection period performed by the next round game after the predetermined round game (reporting by the third notification unit). It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. As described above, by adopting a new notification mode such as prompting the player to select an effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the effect mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-mentioned notification is performed from before the start of the selection period to the end thereof, so that the player can select the effect mode. It is possible to prevent the opportunity of selecting the effect mode from being missed without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second game state. The generation time of the selection period is different between the case where the special game is executed and the case where the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the first game state, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The generation time of the effect mode selection period is different between the case where the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result in the state. Thereby, it is possible to select a production mode in a new mode, such as making the subsequent production mode selectable time different depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the production mode selection from becoming monotonous. Becomes possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
In a case where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all round games constituting the special game have been completed, and Notification during the selection period is performed,
When the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game. Things.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all round games constituting the special game have been completed. Later, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game during the special game is performed. In this case, the effect mode selection period is generated. In this case, the above-described notification by the first notification unit (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification unit (notification during the selection period), and Notification by three notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. In the case where the special display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all round games are completed. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and gives a different impression to the player. Can be given.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of the special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of the special game executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. This makes it possible to select an effect mode in a novel mode, such as making the effect mode selectable time different depending on the type of the special game to be executed, thereby preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period is generated after all round games constituting the first special game are completed, and the notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game have been completed. Later, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large is executed, a selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the notification by the above-described first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and the notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification). For this reason, when the first special game (special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and the second special game is performed. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all round games are completed. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 3, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new mode, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of incoming balls is reduced in a low base state, and the frequency of incoming balls is increased in a high base state. In the low base state, there is a game that aims at the first starting port, and in the high base state, there is a game that aims at the second starting port. Further, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the player hits the right area of the gaming area when the jackpot game or the high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, the player plays a left-handed game, and once in the advantageous state, plays the game in the right-handed game until the advantageous state ends, thereby sharpening the game in the advantageous state. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it is difficult to say that an efficient game can be advanced. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game and increase the game efficiency. In addition, a gaming machine that enhances amusement in games is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is:
A specific starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting port,
Identification information to be displayed variably based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution unit that executes a specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state;
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance enters a ball-enterable state,
A specific starting port, a first variable entrance port, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance port are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting port, a first variable entrance, a variable starting entrance, and a second variable entrance are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. Downstream from, a specific starting port, a first variable entrance, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

  Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable starting port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). Place it at the top of the ball opening. Thereby, the possibility that the variable starting port is first set to the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, by setting the gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific starting port flows down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game proceeds smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable entrance port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to quickly enter the ball when a special game is executed, and to obtain a large number of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable entrance port upstream of the variable starting port, a game ball enters the variable starting port in the second state during the special game, and the first variable entrance port is provided to the first variable entrance port. It is also possible to prevent a situation where entry of the ball is hindered.

  In addition, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entering port, the variable starting port in the second state can be set in the second state unless the first variable entering port is in a state where the ball can enter in a special game. In this way, it is possible to allow the flowing game balls to enter the other entrances with priority. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the variable starting port does not enter the ball even when the variable starting port is in the second state as much as possible. Further, by arranging the second variable entrance port downstream of the variable starting port, the game ball enters the second variable entrance port based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting port. As the frequency changes, various game characteristics can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special aspect, the first special aspect and the second special aspect,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game has more game profit that can be acquired than the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the stop display of the identification information for executing the special game. There are two special games. Then, the first special game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state), and the second special game is performed. In this example, the second variable entrance is set to a state where the ball can be entered.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable starting port to the second state (open state), the specific starting port related thereto is arranged at the most upstream position among these entrance ports. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance port downstream of the specific starting port, the entry of a ball when the first special game having a large amount of game profit is executed is made quick, and a large number of game balls can be provided in a short period of time. Enable acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entrance port, the variable state of the second state can be changed except in the special game where the first variable entrance port is in a state where the ball can enter. It becomes possible to allow a game ball to flow down to the starting port with a higher priority than another ball input port. In addition, the second variable entrance, which can enter the ball in the second special game with a small game profit, is arranged downstream of the variable starting port, so that various game properties can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

As the first special mode and the second special mode, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, gain that can be obtained, and a variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Equipped with a settable game state setting means,
In the second game state, a game ball is introduced into the variable starting port disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side of the variable starting port. By making entry difficult,
The first game state has a higher possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable starting port is low and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering balls is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in a state where the second variable entrance can enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is more in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the game is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game income acquired by entering the variable starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game profit (for example, a prize ball given when one game ball is entered) obtained by entering the game ball is set to the second or more than the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game is generated, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is less likely to be in the second state, the flowing game balls are likely to enter the second variable entrance on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, the ball easily enters the upstream variable starting port. As a result, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable entrance where more game profit can be obtained than the variable starting port, and expects the second special game to occur in the first game state. Enhance the entertainment of the game. In addition, by this, it is possible to make the obtainable game profit different when the same second special game occurs in the first game state and the second game state, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the game entertainment. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues after the execution of the second special game in the first game state. By generating a game, more game profit can be obtained.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are concurrently displayed. (Simultaneously) variable display is possible. Thereby, in the simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine (simultaneous fluctuation machine) which can simultaneously (variably) display the first identification information and the identification information, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and to improve the gaming entertainment while enabling a smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and the execution of the big hit game triggers the normal state to a probable change state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine to shift. In addition, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed for a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is returned. Such a gaming machine has exhibited a certain effect of preventing the game from being bored by shifting the gaming state.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies gaming properties and enhances amusement of gaming by giving a feature to a transition state of a gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 includes:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, in the high probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed. At the specific number of times, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1.
A second identification result as the identification result;
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Also, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player Make it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the second gaming state with a high probability when the specified number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state with a higher probability and a larger gaming profit is obtained in the first gaming state than in a second gaming state with a higher probability. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is introduced into the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball disposed on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 5, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to a gaming area, and
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area where a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
Does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification result is obtained as a result of a change display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, the first starting port is provided in a first game area where a ball can be entered at a first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in a second game area where a ball can be entered at a second firing intensity. . Then, when the first identification result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specification result, but has the first specification result as the result of the variable display of the second identification information. Thereby, different game characteristics can be provided depending on whether a game ball enters the first starting port and a case where a game ball enters the second starting port. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1.
A second identification result as the identification result;
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Also, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player Make it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability and the first gaming state when the specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 or 6-2.
A third identification result as the identification result;
When the third specified result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next specified result is obtained. And
The third identification result may be obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on a ball entering the first starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the game state after the end of the special game as the third specified result is set to the first game state with a high probability, the game state is maintained at the first game state with a high probability until the next specified result. Shall do. Thereby, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no change from the high probability and the second game state to the high probability and the first game state based on the change display of the specific number of times, and the special game end. After that, the game state is guaranteed with a high probability and a game state of the first game state until the next specific result is obtained. In addition, thereby, in a game accompanied by a change display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state with a higher probability and a larger gaming profit is obtained in the first gaming state than in a second gaming state with a higher probability. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is introduced into the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball disposed on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
A first identification result and a fourth identification result as the identification result;
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the change in the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, as a first identification result, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second game state When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state as a fourth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

  In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a high probability. It changes to one game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the first identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state is set to a high probability and the second gaming state. May be changed to the first game state with high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information reaches the first number or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variable display of the second identification information, the gaming state is set to a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed from the state to the first gaming state with high probability.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The identification result includes a second identification result and a fifth identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the fifth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second identification result, the first probability is set at the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of change display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state as the fifth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Also, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player Make it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment. Further, by this, during execution of the common effect, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the first number has elapsed and when the second number has elapsed, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the gaming state changes in the second number, it is more likely that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes in the second number than in the case in which the gaming state changes in the first number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is greater than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of changing the gaming state is the second number than when it is the first number. It is highly probable and likely to change to the first gaming state. Thereby, when reaching the first number, the player plays the game expecting that the gaming state is maintained without change, and reaches the second number with the gaming state kept in the second gaming state. At this time, a game is played with a high probability and a high sense of expectation that the game state changes to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the game state changes in the first number of times, it is more likely that the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state when the game state changes in the first number of times than when the game state changes in the second number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is greater than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of change of the gaming state is the first number than when it is the second number. It is highly probable and likely to change to the first gaming state. This allows the player to play a game with the expectation that the game state will change when the first number of times is reached, and is possible when the player reaches the second number of times while the game state remains the second game state. Although the sex is lower than that of the first time, the game is played with a high probability and expecting to change to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state with a higher probability and a larger gaming profit is obtained in the first gaming state than in a second gaming state with a higher probability. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is introduced into the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball disposed on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A first condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, a second condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, A second identification information variation time determining means that can set
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter than the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state; the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state; and the high probability and the first game state and the first condition It has two condition states and the high probability, the second game state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, a probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the second condition A second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, and a high probability. And a second game state and a second condition state. In the game state in which the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific result. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as the specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the game profit, or increase the possibility of becoming an advantageous state after the end of the special game. is there. Accordingly, the player expects that the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the time of the variable display of the second identification information is relatively short is set. To play the game. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
It has a third starting port into which game balls can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on a ball entering the third starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with the third starting port in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entering of a game ball. As a result, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner by entering one of the variable type second starting port and the third starting port, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second start port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port are a second game in which a game ball fired at the second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game is played by launching a game ball into the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state for variably displaying the second identification information, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port enter a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. Provided in a possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second The variable entrance is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game is played by launching a game ball into the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state for variably displaying the second identification information, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-5.
The high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the first gaming state and the second condition state have a higher probability and the first game state and the second condition state are higher than the high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state is a gaming state. I have. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is set to the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability, in the second gaming state, and in the second condition state, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second starting port is positioned higher than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entrance provided on the downstream side, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance is increased with the high probability and the second game. The state, the first probability, and the second condition state are higher than those of the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state are higher probability and the second condition. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is higher than in the gaming state and the second condition state. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
A second variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The game state includes the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, and the high probability and the second game state. And
The second variable entrance is characterized in that, when the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state, the frequency of entering the gaming ball is increased.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state, a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance increases with a high probability and in the first gaming state. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are second game areas in which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, by playing a game ball in the first gaming area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is fired in the second game area. A gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
By launching a game ball in the second game area, the second identification information is variably displayed, and in a game state of playing a game,
The frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state with a predetermined probability, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is transmitted. It is assumed that a game is played with the display being changed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, that is, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, A game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable entrance is the highest is defined as a first game state with a high probability.

  Thus, when the player enters a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, the player proceeds with the game in expectation that the gaming state is a high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is introduced into the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball disposed on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give a predetermined profit to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for enhancing the sense of expectation of the player are performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, so that the gaming entertainment is improved. As such an effect, for example, information relating to a change display of identification information currently being executed or a change display of identification information to be executed thereafter (eg, the degree of expectation (reliability) that a display result becomes a specific display result, the display) An effect of displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until a result is derived is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-239122).

  However, the effect performed during the above-described change display of the identification information has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of a player as an effect performed during a variable display of identification information. The aim is to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows:
A variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
State control means capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
Information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the change display during the change display of the identification information,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a less favorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect execution means is capable of displaying at least two of the first to third information at the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the variable display of the identification information, when performing the information display effect to display information about the game after the end of the variable display, at the start of the information display effect, First information indicating that the special game is to be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state is to be continued after the end of the variable display, and the game state having been changed after the end of the variable display. It is also possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the game state is disadvantageous. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 described above.
When starting the information display effect, the information display effect execution means may display the first information and the second information, or may display the second information and the third information. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the first information and the second information are displayed and a case where the second information and the third information are displayed when the information display effect is started. Therefore, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can assume that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous, and the second When the information and the third information are displayed, it is not possible to exclude the possibility that the later game development is disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that stirs up expectations and anxiety of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above.
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state,
The second special game is a special game having more game profit that can be provided than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls a game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls a game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state. The game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In addition, the game state after the first special game ends is a first game state, and the game state after the second special game ends is a second game state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is to be executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. For this reason, the information display effect displays information (game development) relating to the game based on the game (variation display of the identification information) in the second game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the second game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-3 described above.
It is provided with a fluctuation effect execution means capable of executing a fluctuation effect during the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The fluctuation effect execution means can execute a fluctuation effect based on a predetermined fluctuation effect pattern,
The variable effect pattern includes at least a first variable effect pattern, a second variable effect pattern, and a third variable effect pattern,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the second special game can be executed, and during the change display, a change effect based on the first change effect pattern can be executed,
When the first special game is executable by the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern can be performed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
The information display effect execution means,
The first information and the second information can be displayed when a variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed,
When a fluctuation effect based on the second fluctuation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a variable effect based on the predetermined variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and at least the first variable effect pattern and the second variable effect are used as the variable effect patterns. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the variable display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game becomes executable because the result becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In such a case, it is possible to execute a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern during the variable display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed, the information display in the variable display is performed. When the effect is started, the first information and the second information can be displayed. When a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect in the variable display. The second information and the third information can be displayed. For this reason, when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. Accordingly, it is possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the fluctuation display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the change display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be based on the subsequent information display mode. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game that can provide a predetermined game profit to a player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of a game such as a change display of identification information or a special game. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine that performs an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the change display of the identification information is a specific display result as a character effect of a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2016-154657).

  However, a configuration for performing a character effect in a reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to enhance the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect. It is in.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
A variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
And a performance performing means capable of performing a predetermined performance, comprising:
The effect executing means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed according to the change display of the identification information, and a case where a character effect is executed according to a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect displayed by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information and a case where the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to provide a relevance between the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means can control a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state at the time of performing the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed by the variation display of the identification information. , And may be executed in conjunction with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, a first specific display result and a second specific display result are included,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the change display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result,
The first special game has more game profit that can be provided than the second special game,
The effect executing means,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the change display,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, a character effect is executed in accordance with the change display, and the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. Thereby, the game entertainment in the case where the change display of the identification information, which is the trigger of execution of the first special game (the display result of the change display becomes the first specific display result), or the case where the second special game is performed, is provided. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 described above.
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering game balls into the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The effect executing means,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the variation display,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, entering of the game ball into the first variable entrance is performed. In the second special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state. Thus, the second variable game associated with the second special game can be executed in a situation where the variable display of the identification information, which is an execution trigger of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result), can be executed It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, and to enhance the interest in the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, as a probability (execution probability of the first special game) that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, Can be set, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game is executed increases, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect accompanying the second special game is executed increases. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment when the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, so that the possibility of performing the character effect accompanying the second special game is high. It is possible to attract the player's interest in executing the character effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information in a situation where the game is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
The character displayed on the predetermined display unit includes a first character and a second character,
The character production has a first character production and a second character production,
The first character effect is an effect that includes a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect executing means,
When performing a character effect in accordance with the change display of the identification information, the first character effect is executed,
In the case where a character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and a character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, a first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and a second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character effect in a mode suitable for the game situation, and to attract the interest of the player to the character effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 11, it is possible to enhance the gaming attraction of a gaming machine having a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display section), 8 effect symbols, 20 first starting port, 21 second starting port, 30 first winning port, 35 second winning port, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured so that it is possible to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, there is provided a selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from the plurality of effect modes. Gaming machine.

Images